Home

Samsung 7100 Medical Alarms User Manual

1. et rentrer senes 2 161 512 HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT 2 162 513 HOTEL TIMER bn rear ern adea 2 163 514 TONE SOURGE tnter ete tete tud ertet ete uei a Deere da 2 164 515 DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT 1 2 165 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR 2 166 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP 1 2 167 602 STATION GROUP ee eee ete tees 2 172 603 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP 2 173 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE 2 175 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE en een terrere tenis 2 176 X SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK oii hoti eec needle ie con ca dee EE 2 177 607 UGD OP TIONS tfe E cc nates 2 179 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK e 2 183 609 CALE LOG BOCK 2 184 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING 2 185 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE
2. 2 186 614 STATION TRUNK USE GROUP 2 187 615 MGI GROJUP ertet te tide ed e eter euet e a e e eo dae 2 188 616 MGI S ER em ni etm i Sees be Sane toes cr Nai Me eder a s 2 190 700 COPY COS CONTENTS supap terrere nette 2 191 701 ASSIGN COS 2 192 702 TOLL DENY TABEE 2 ettet ttr ratae tac cer rtg 2 196 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE 1 rennen innen 2 197 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER 2 199 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED 2 200 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME 2 201 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE certet ertet tret reete 2 203 ZOS ACCOUNT CODE 2 204 709 TOLL PASS CODE SPECIAL CODE TABLE sese 2 205 71 0 ECR DIGIT TABLE 2 207 711 CCR TIME TABLE i ett Er eee me erc 2 208 712 ECR ROUTE TABLE teet 2 209 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE E 2 211 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME
3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press Transfer button and enter 805 Display shows Press Volume button to make selection 0 3 and press Right Soft button to move cursor When the TX LEVEL CONTROL is selected Select the desired volume level via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to go to the next volume level and press Right Soft button Enter desired volume data via dial keypad OR When the MISC TSW GAIN is selected Enter desired MISC BGM TSW gain via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to select desired MISC BGM TSW gain and press Right Soft button When the TSW GAIN CONTROL is selected Select the TX TWS connect type via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to go to the next TX TSW connect type and press Right Soft button Select the RX TSW connect type via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to go to the next RX TSW connect type and press Right Soft button Enter desired TSW gain control data via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to scroll data and press Right Soft button Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 270 DISPLAY TX LEVEL CONTROL LEVEL 020 TX LEVEL CONTROL LEVEL 121 TX LEVEL CONTROL LEVEL 191 TX LEVEL CONTROL LEVEL 123 MISC TSW GAIN BGM MOH 0 TSW
4. No Category Description 1 USABLE FEATURE No COS Default Description 53 REM HOLD YES Remote Hold 54 RNG PLAN YES Ring Mode Change 55 SECURE YES Barge In secure 56 SET RLOC NO Set Relocation 57 SSPD TOL YES System Speed dial toll check 58 STN LOCK YES Station Lock 59 SYS SPD YES System Speed dial 60 TRK AREC NO Trunk call automatic record SVM 800 61 TRK EHLD YES Trunk call exclusive hold 62 UNCO CNF YES Unsupervised Conference 63 VM AREC NO Auto Record SVMi 64 VM AME NO Answer Machine Emulation SVMi 65 VM REC NO Call Record SVMi 66 VMSPSWD NO VMS password SVM 800 67 VMS REC NO VMS Call Record SVM 800 2 CALL STATION STN GROUP 01 80 YES Station group 01 80 calling GROUP 3 CALL TRUNK TRK GROUP 01 30 YES Trunk group 01 30 calling GROUP 4 CALLTO BIVMS STN 01 16 YES SVMi port 01 16 calling BIVMS STN SVMi DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION 2 194 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 701 COS CONTENTS 01 Display shows TOLL LEVEL A Dial COS e g 06 COS CONTENTS 06 OR TOLL LEVEL A Press Volume button to select COS number and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial COS contents categories COS CONTENTS 06 e g 1 for Usable Features 00 AA CALER YES OR Press Volume butt
5. 221 EXTENSION This MMC assigns station ports for a specific use Each phone can be designated as one of five types see table These types can be changed by dialling the type number or by scroll ing through the types and pressing the Right Soft button to select the type No Type Description 0 NORMAL STATION This is the default setting The station will operate in the normal manner associated with this type of station Ports designated as VMAA in MMC 207 must be designated as normal in this MMC 1 GUEST SMOKING When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room status and check in features as a smoking room 2 GUEST NO SMOKING When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room status and check in features as a non smoking room 3 MEETING ROOM Stations designated as Meeting Rooms will have the same attrib utes as guest rooms with regard to cleaning and occupied status but will not show up while scrolling through room status lists 4 ADMINISTRATOR Only stations designated as administrator stations can use Hotel features check in etc 5 FAX STATION When a station is designated as this type it can be assigned as a pair station to a GUEST SMOKING ROOM or GUEST NO SMOKING ROOM in MMC 222 CONDITIONS This MMC can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION DEFAULT DATA NORMAL
6. 1 4 3 Technician Level Programming This level is allowed to program every level of program This level of programming can be done on every phone within the system but it can be done for only one phone at a time Table 1 8 Technician Level Programming list MMC No MMC Name MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM MMC 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE MMC 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER MMC 804 SYS I O MODE MMC 805 TX LEVEL AND GAIN MMC 806 CARD PRE INSTALL MMC 807 PHONE VOLUME CONTROL MMC 810 HALT PROCESSING MMC 811 RESET SYSTEM MMC 812 SET COUNTRY CODE MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION MMC 815 CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY MMC 818 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD MMC 819 MC FILE CONTROL MMC 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID MMC 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK MMC 822 VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE MMC 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS MMC 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION MMC 825 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS MMC 826 ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK MMC 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS MMC 832 VoIP ACCESS CODE MMC 833 VoIP IP TABLE MMC 834 H 323 OPTIONS MMC 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS MMC 836 H 323 GK OPTIONS 1 14 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Table 1 8 Technician Level Programming list continued
7. 108 STATION STATUS This is a READ ONLY MMC Displays the following attributes of a station port No Status Description 0 PORT NO Cabinet 1 Slot MP 1 2 Port 1 12 1 TYPE Phone Type 2 PICKUP GROUP None 01 99 3 SGR Station Group Number 4 BOSS SECR None 1 4 5 PAGE None Page Zone 0 4 6 COS 1 COS 2 COS 1 30 per Ring Plan 01 06 DEFAULT DATA PORT FOLLOWS HARDWARE POSITION TYPE DEPENDENT ON CONNECTED PHONE PICKUP GRP NONE SGR NONE BOSS SECR NONE PAGE ZONE NONE COS NUMBER 01 IN ALL RING PLANS ACTION 1 2 3 4 2 16 DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 108 201 STN STATUS Display shows first station Dial station number e g 205 OR 2 1 51 12 01 205 STN STATUS ROR TECI 91 205 Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial 0 9 to select station status type 205 STN STATUS OR Press Volume button to select status and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC 302 PICKUP GROUPS MMC 303 ASSIGN BOSS SECRETARY MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP MMC 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE Sam
8. 320 PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER Allows a technician to assign a default destination for Forward No Answer FNA to each station on the system These destinations may be the same or different for each station The preset FNA destination will be temporarily overwritten if the station user enters a different FNA destination If you cancel the new destination the preset destination will once more be in effect Preset FNA time follows the station NO ANS FWD timer MMC 502 Preset FNA can be assigned respectively for each type of call No Type Description 0 INT Preset FNA applies only to intercom calls 1 EXT Preset FNA applies only to incoming calls 2 BOTH Preset FNA applies to both intercom and incoming calls When using PRE FWD BUSY option in MMC 210 If PRE FWD BUSY option in MMC 210 is set ON the forward busy follows this feature DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 320 201 PRESET FNA Display shows NONE _ OPT BOTH 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 PRESET FNA OR NONE OPT BOTH Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL PRESET FNA Select all stations NONE 3 Dial valid number via keypad 205 PRESET FNA OR 202 OPT BOTH Press Volume button to select call type and press Right Soft button
9. continued Feature Default Description SETMG 41 SET MESSAGE W O RING SLOCAT NONE STAFF LOCATOR Hotel Feature SLTALM NONE EASY ALARM SET TO SELF STATION SLTMMC 15 NORMAL PHONE PROGRAMMING SNR 17 SAVED NUMBER REDIAL SPEED 16 SPEED DIAL SRELOC NONE SET RELOCATION SSET NONE ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE SET STATE NONE SET EXECUTIVE STATE TCLIP NONE TEMP CLIP TP NONE TERMINAL PORTABILIY UA 67 UNIVERSAL ANSWER VMADM NONE VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION Requires SVMi card VMAME NONE ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION Requires SVMi card VMMEMO NONE VOICE MAIL MEMO Requires SVMi card VMMSG NONE VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY Requires SVMi card VMSCMT NONE VMS COMMENT Requires SVM 800 VMSMSG NONE VMS MESSAGE Requires SVM 800 WAKEUP 18 WAKE UP Hotel Feature WCOS 59 WORKING CLASS OF SERVICE DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION 2 234 FEATURE CODES DEPEND ON COUNTRY Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 724 STN DIAL NUM C1 Display shows 82 P01 201 2 Dial option number to make selection e g 06 FEAT DIAL NUMBER OR ABAND 642 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Dial first letter of feature name e g 7 Hj EAT NUMBER PLAN OR PAGE 55 gt Press Volume button to make selection then p
10. 756 ASSIGN VMMOH This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built In Voice Mail It is used to assign each port a Music On Hold source for the system from a sound file located on the Voice Mail card hard disk drive The 100 available sound files are defined as numbers 5000 to 5099 To use the default music select the number otherwise make sure you record the sound file first Then assign the sound file to a Voice Mail port For example if you record sound file 5025 you would associate 25 with a specific Voice Mail port e g 301 This will dedicate the port for use only as MOH and remove it from group 529 or 549 Now 301 will show up as a valid music source in MMCs 308 309 and 408 Each Music On Hold source assigned here requires one Voice Mail port NOTE ports When the first Built In Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH If the first Built In Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH it must be disabled before boot up since Built In Voice Mail and the system use port 1 during boot up to ex change critical information For this reason we suggest you use the last port as DEFAULT DATA NOT USED ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 756 Display shows 2 Dial VM number e g 301 OR Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter VM message number e g 25 OR Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft butt
11. ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 500 ALARM REM CNTER Display shows 05 gt 2 Enter number from above list e g 6 UCDS AUDIO ALARM OR 00 gt Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter in new value via dial keypad UCDS AUDIO ALARM If entry is valid system will return to step 2 0002 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 140 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 501 SYSTEM TIMERS Allows the technician to adjust individual timers as necessary TIMER TABLE Timer Name Default Range Unit Description ALARM TIME 100 0 2500 MIN This is the time the system alarm key will start ringing after the alarm key has been silenced ALERT TONE TIME 1000 100 2500 This timer sets the duration of the attention MSEC tone preceding a call to a phone in the Voice Announce or Auto Answer mode This tone will also precede a forced Auto Answer call ALM REM INTERVAL 25 1 250 SEC This timer controls the time between ring at tempts at a station when alarm reminder is set ALM REM RING OFF 10 1 25 SEC This timer controls the length of the ring cycle duration when an alarm reminder is set at a station ATT RECALL TIME 30 0 250 SEC This controls how long a transfer recall will ring at a station b
12. No Type Description 00 PORT Port Number Cabinet Slot Port 01 TYPE LOOP GND E amp M DID BRI PRI VOIP 02 1A2 EMULATE 1A2 Emulation On Off 03 TRK FORWARD Trunk Forward On Off 04 LINE CO PBX 05 DIAL DTFM Dial Pulse 06 11 TOLL TYPE 1 6 Ring Plan Toll Restriction 1 6 12 17 RING PLAN 1 6 Ring Plan Ring Destination 1 6 18 MOH SOURCE MOH Source 19 DISA LINE DISA Status DEFAULT DATA FOLLOWS TRUNK ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 409 701 TRK STATUS Display shows PORT C1 S5 P01 2 Enter trunk number via dial keypad e g 704 704 TRK STATUS OR PORT C1 S5 P04 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Enter desired option 00 19 e g 01 704 TRK STATUS OR TYPE LOOP TRUNK Press Volume button to make selection 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC Samsung Business Communications 2 109 CHAPTER 2 RELATED ITEMS 2 110 MMC 400 MMC 401 MMC 402 MMC 403 MMC 404 MMC 406 MMC 408 MMC 410 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TRUNK TRUNK LINE PBX LINE TRUNK DIAL TYPE TRUNK TOLL CLASS TRUNK NAME TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE ASSIGN DISA TRUNK Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK Allows the system to have Direct Inwar
13. RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS 2 22 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 111 PHONE RING TONE Allows the system administrator or technician to select the ring tone heard at each phone Eight ring tones are available A short tone burst of the selection will be heard when the dial keypad is pressed DEFAULT DATA FREQUENCY 5 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 111 201 RING TONE Display shows SELECTION 5 2 Dial phone number e g 205 205 RING TONE OR SELECTION 5 Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL RING TONE Select all stations SELECTION 2 3 Dial 1 8 to select ring tone 205 RING TONE OR SELECTION 5 Press Volume button to select ring tone and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 114 PHONE VOLUME MMC 318 DISTINCTIVE RINGING Samsung Business Communications 2 23 CHAPTER 2 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock appointment reminder feature for any station Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm m
14. 2 49 205 ASSIGN LOUD BELL nter etd 2 50 206 BARGE IN LYDPE t ep D o ie teet 2 51 207 ASSIGN VM AA nri trennen nnne 2 52 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 209 ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE 0 eee ne eee tne 2 54 210 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TENANT 2 55 211 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT 2 60 214 DISA ALARM RINGING STATION nnne nnne nnne 2 61 217 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION ccccccececiccecicscincsivessiadeceassadseenuasncaduncntveeduedivesuheatceevacawectvess 2 62 219 REEAY ANP EE 2 64 220 ISDN SERVICE TYPE ree eee ticos rien eee Irene ree ide 2 65 224 EXTENSION TYPE eese te rd deu eei 2 66 222 FAX PAIR A t es tmt odi e etm Nei toS a eti Mea sedo er 2 68 224 WAKE UP entree tnnr etre senten 2 69 300 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER STATION nennen nnne nnne 2 71 301 ASSIGN STATION eterni naar tna d previn ra taa abb ena dace ana 2 73 302 POKU P CRO U P S ne te tret ett tm tte 2 75 303 ASSIGN BOSS SECRETARY 2 76 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION TRUNK USE sse nennen nnne ennt 2 77 305 ASSI
15. Using large LCD Phones Large LCD phones DS ITP 5012L do not have programmable buttons Instead they display programming functions on the LCD to be selected via the selection buttons Refer to your keyset user guide for more infor mation 1 3 Cautions in Programming Programming can be done only while the handset is placed on the phone in idle state Full programming can be done on any digital LCD phone Only station level programming is allowed on a phone that does not have an LCD display Ifthe LCD displays an INVALID DATA message while programming reenter the correct data fno button is pressed for a certain period of time during programming default is 60 seconds the phone returns to the idle state from programming mode Programming mode halts if the handset is picked up or the Transfer button is pressed or the phone is unplugged Any data previously entered in the display is saved 1 6 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 1 4 Program List by User s Level The MMC program can be divided into programmable one and non programmable one The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels such as technician operator and sta tion level In this section the programmable MMC for each level will be introduced 1 4 1 Station Level Programming Programming can be done for only station level programs Table 1 1 Station Level Progra
16. 121 PHONE LANGUAGE Allows the system administrator to assign an LCD display based on the user s own lan guage No Language 00 ENGLISH 01 GERMAN 02 PORTUGAL 03 NORSK 04 DANISH 05 DUTCH 06 ITALY 07 SPANISH 08 SWEDISH 09 SPANISH USA 10 FRENCH CANADA 11 FINNISH DEFAULT DATA ENGLISH ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 121 201 LANGUAGE Display shows ENGLISH 2 Dialstation number e g 205 205 LANGUAGE OR ENGLISH 2 38 3 4 Press Volume button to select station and use Right Soft button to move cursor OR Select all stations Dial 00 10 for language required 205 LANGUAGE OR ALL LANGUAGE 2 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 39 CHAPTER 2 122 NEWS DISPLAY SPEED Used to set the Smart News display speed between 0300 mS fastest and 1 sec slowest This timer is related to the Smart News PC Application Package DEFAULT DATA 03 0300 mS ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 122 201 CALL SPEED Display shows first stat
17. 2 213 715 PROGRAMMED STATION sse neret 2 216 16 UK EGRCOPTION E dee rte 2 217 717 UCD AGENT ID iori te in nett eec etie ttr eerte cte tee ee petere rds 2 219 718 MY AREA CODE iio teet perc toti thew tr 2 220 719 IDEE DIS PLAY 2 ti ier tbi teneant dedere tette e aether tei 2 221 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING itr 2 222 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING essen 2 223 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING inre 2 224 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING ren herren ren terret entes 2 228 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN esses enne ennemi 2 230 25 SMBR OPTIONGS itte t itor ott tene tt edd Pede ode Eben re dedere Ea 2 236 727 SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY 2 239 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE 1 2 240 FAS TATON BV 2 241 746 COSTING DIAL PLAN tutor t rnnt ettet hb ecran hr piain 2 242 747 RATE CALCULATION TABLE 2 244 Samsung Business Communications XI XII 750 VM CARD RESTART hinaia a aa Eco dae 2 246 51 ASSIGNIMAIEBO X 1 ce eite term
18. 201 CUS PASSCODE SELECT PROG ID MMC 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE MMC 501 SYSTEM WIDE TIMERS MMC 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER 2 44 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE Used to change the passcode allowing access to MMC 200 Open Customer Programming from its current value CONDITIONS The passcode is four digits long Each digit can be 0 9 current old passcode is required for this MMC DEFAULT DATA PASSCODE 1234 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 201 CUST PASSCODE NEW CODE _ 2 Enter new passcode via dial keypad CUST PASSCODE maximum four digits NEW CODE Q UST PASSCODE 3 Verify new passcode via dial keypad lt ERTEY AANA Passcode verified go to step 4 Q UST PASSCODE OR VERIFY SUCCESS Passcode failure return to step 2 Q UST PASSCODE lt MUSED NE SS 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications 2 45 CHAPTER 2 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE Used to change the passcodes for the following features No Feature Description 0 RING PLAN The passcode re
19. Option Description APP To upgrade application including MP and VM module SYS Include all modules DRV To upgrade Driver F W including SP MGI drivers WEB To upgrade WEB UI RUT To upgrade Router module limited in MP11 MSP To upgrade MSP driver CSP To upgrade CSP driver PR2 To upgrade TEPRI2 Package PRI To upgrade TEPRI TEPRIa Package DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 818 PGM DOWNLOAD Display shows APP apl0v014 pkg 2 Press Volume button to select program type PGM DOWNLOAD and press Right Soft button to move cursor SYS rdl0v014 pkg 3 Press Volume button to select YES and SYSTEM PKG press Right Soft button to move cursor DOWNLOAD NOW YES 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 281 CHAPTER 2 819 MC FILE CONTROL Displays the size in bytes of various system program files on the MC card Files included in MC card are described below File Name Description Startup ini If user designates an MCP program in MMC 818 related data are saved in this file This file is initially not included but is created when the above programs are se lected at MMC 818 Ms10v508 pkg MSP driver program This program must be included in MC card to start the system Cs10v101 pkg MSP driver program
20. 2 248 b2 AUTO RECORD tette ip edet ee e tei Ue een eet n e Es 2 249 753 WARNING DESTINATION rne nInrennren nennen rre 2 251 FIBRAS 2 252 255 VM ALARM TEE 2 253 7 56 2 254 757 bep 2 255 598 NVM DAY NIGHT tont ete d Nes 2 256 59 CEERINGING rhe ceteri ete tenen vei tes ter ib i ee ecd eerte 2 257 760 ITEM COST TABLE ii eire itt detiene ees Eos ne apre EA sec niens 2 259 761 TAX RATE SETUPD eiie tite irn rtr entire arte 2 261 762 ROOM COST RAT E vc 2 netter teet tee rA RE tr Redde ad A REED 2 263 763 SECOND EGR quc 2 264 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN 2 266 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE sse rennen rennes 2 267 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC 2 268 805 TX LEVELAND GAIN treten 2 269 B06 CARD PRE INSTALL arte tra tr eire eei rate 2 271 807 PHONE VOLUME 2 273 810 HALT PROCESSING etr iere ti ote eee tr e 2 275 811 RESET SYSTEM iicet itte seco eiie 2 276 912 SET GOUNTRY CODE et tee ettet
21. 2 351 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS edd ete a a i i T s 2 352 863 NODE INEO ain oneee aa i 2 355 890 INITIALIZE PORT itte tt jede treten eere tette re setate reet aidea 2 356 ABBREVIATION hr EE mcs MM M 1 IV M V aD C RET VI Samsung Business Communications XIII LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1 1 24B LCD DCS Euro Phone nennen 1 2 Figure 1 2 05 50385 Phone 1 3 Figure 1 3 DS ITP 5014D 5021D mener nennen nes 1 4 Figure 1 4 DS 50148 50078 Phone ssssssseesseeenee enne entretien nennen nnns 1 5 LIST OF TABLES Table 1 1 Station Level Programming list 4 enne 1 7 Table 1 2 System Related MMC list 1 8 Table 1 3 Station Related MMC list emen 1 9 Table 1 4 Trunk Related MMC list enne eene eene 1 10 Table 1 5 Timer and Tone Related MMC list 1 11 Table 1 6 Group Related MMC list emnes 1 11 Table 1 7 Tables Codes AA DECT and VM 5 1 12 Table 1 8 Technician Lev
22. Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 210 TEN ON AND OFF Display shows DISA PSWD 2 Dial option number e g 00 TEN ON AND OFF Press Right Soft button to move cursor DISA PSWD OFF 3 Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF TEN ON AND OFF OR DISA PSWD ON Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Repeat steps 2 3 for other options OR Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 59 CHAPTER 2 211 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT Designates which station or group of stations will ring when a door phone button is pressed If the ring plan destinations are not entered the default ring plan 1 is used Available ring plans are 1 to 6 DEFAULT DATA STATION GROUP 500 ACTION 1 2 3 4 DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 211 229 DOOR RING Display shows first door phone 1 500 2 500 Dial door phone number e g 230 230 DOOR RING OR 12500 25500 Press Volume button to scroll through door phone numbers and use the Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL DOOR RING Select door ring 19800 22500 Enter new ring plan number selection via dial
23. each rate and press Right Soft button to return to TAXES 11000000 step 2 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 761 TAX RATE SETUP 2 260 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 761 TAX RATE SETUP This MMC allows the technician to set up the eight tax rates used in MMC 760 Each tax rate may be defined as a fixed value or as a percentage of the item cost In addition a 10 character name may be used to define the reason for the tax The options are detailed below Option Description TAX RATE The number assigned to this tax rate Tax rates are numbered 1 to 8 to match the rate field in MMC 760 counting from left to right TYPE The type of tax Defines if the VALUE is applied as a percentage of the cost of an item e g service charge or is added as a fixed currency value C to an item or is applied as a Inclusive VAT percentage l of the cost of an item VALUE The actual tax rate that will be applied to the item cost NAME A 10 character name that will be displayed on the room bill alongside the tax CONDITIONS This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME DEFAULT DATA ALL RATES ARE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button
24. DLSEND OVERLAP 72 BRAT we CLIP TABLE NONE 727 NB TYPE UNKNOWN 727 BRI TRK CLIP TABLE 1 729 BRI STN CHANNEL ANY YES 772 CHANNEL ANY YES 729 BRI STN POWER FEED NO 729 BRI STN POWER FEED YES Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide RELATED ITEMS MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER MMC 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER MMC 418 BRI amp PRI CARD RESTART MMC 421 MSN DIGIT MMC 423 S T MODE MMC 714 DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION Samsung Business Communications 2 121 CHAPTER 2 420 PRI OPTIONS This MMC allows the technician to program a PRI trunk card No Option Description 0 CHANNELANY When this option is set to YES the system will place calls on any free channel of that PRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy If set to NO they will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that PRI is free 1 PRI MODE PRI access mode select NORMAL Point to Point NORMAL This operates like a standard telephone line with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406 DID Point to Point Direct Inward Dial This operates in a similar manner to an analogue DID circuit with multiple CO numbers
25. OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ae ELECTRONICS COPYRIGHT This guide is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd and is protected by copyright No information contained herein may be copied translated transcribed or duplicated for any commercial pur poses or disclosed to the third party in any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd TRADEMARKS Enterprise IP Solutions Office is the trademark of SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Product names mentioned in this guide may be trademarks and or registered trademarks of their respective companies This guide should be read and used as a guideline for properly installing and operating the product This guide may be changed for the system improvement standardization and other technical reasons without prior notice If you need updated guides or have any questions concerning the contents of the guides contact our Document Center at the following address or Web site Address Document Center 18th Floor IT Center Dong Suwon Box 105 416 Maetan 3dong Yeongtong gu Suwon si Gyeonggi do Korea 442 600 Homepage http www samsungdocs com 2007 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide INTRODUCTION Purpose This guide describes a programming method for the OfficeServ 7100 system users OfficeServ 7100 allows you to utilize a digital p
26. No Code Alarm Name Definition MJD DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault 50 MJD18 E1 Restart The E1 card has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 51 MJD19 PRI Restart The PRI card has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 52 MJD20 BRI Restart The BRI card has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 53 MJD21 PCM Loss Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 54 MJD22 PCM Recovery Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJE MGI Error MGI card Fault 55 MJEO1 MGI Restart The MGI card has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 56 MJE02 MGI Stop The MGI card has stoped Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 57 MJE03 MGI IP Duplicate The MGI card IP address is duplicated Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 58 MJE04 MGI NTWK Error The MGI card has blocked because the system detects the card doesn t respond via network link External ping test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 59 MJE05 MGI NTWK The MGI card has restarted because the system detects the card does respond via network link External ping test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 60 MJE06 MGI DSP Error The MGI card DSP has blocked because the system detects the card DSP does not run correctly Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy Pzz 61 MJE07 MGI DSP Run The MGI card DSP has restarted because the system detects the card DSP runs correctly Alarm Data Cabine
27. 301 ASSIGN STATION COS Used to assign a class of service to each phone There are 30 different classes of service defined in MMC 701 Assign COS Contents and six ring plans based on the Ring Plan Time in MMC 507 that can apply to the COS Classes of service are numbered 01 30 The default is COS 01 DEFAULT DATA RING PLANS 1 6 01 ACTION 1 2 3 4 Press Transfer button and enter 301 Display shows first station Dial station number e g 205 OR Use Volume button to scroll through stations Press Right Soft button to advance step 3 OR Use Volume button to scroll through stations and press Left Soft button to advance to step 4 OR Select all stations Enter new ring plan selection via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter ring plan class of service e g 05 OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to advance to the next ring plan OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2 Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY 201 STN COS OT 2801 5301 205 STN cos 1 01 2 01 3 01 ALL STN COS Se 205 SIN COs 2801 5301 205 SIN COS 1205 gu 5301 2 73 CHAPTER 2 5 Enter the next ring plan class of service e g 05 205 STN COS
28. LCR 4 DISPLAY ROUTE 01 1 INOINI ROUTE 05 1 0 582 82 G NONE M ROUTE 05 2 G 801 M 2 209 CHAPTER 2 RELATED ITEMS 2 210 6 Dial MODIFY DIGITS index number e g 050 OR Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR Press Right Soft button to skip step and move cursor to step 2 7 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC MMC 310 MMC 710 MMC 711 MMC 713 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE LCR DIGIT TABLE LCR TIME TABLE LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE LCR ROUTE 0582 Gesell 2050 LCR ROUTE OSE CsA Eme Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE This program is sometimes referred to as Outgoing Dial Rules It enables the system to add or delete a digit string or singular digit if needed to complete a call With these digits in serted a long distance call will be placed over a local line using the common carrier net work The characters and can also be entered There are 200 modify digit entries avail able Option Description Max No of Digit Entries NOF DEL DGT Number of digits to delete 15 Insert before dialling string
29. MRX NORMAL NORMAL MKX Q SIGNALLING 2 285 CHAPTER 2 822 VIRTUAL EXTENSION Assigns the virtual extension port type The virtual extension port types are followed No Type Description 00 SLT Emulates SLI port 01 24 BTN SET 24 buttons phone 02 12 BTN SET 12 buttons phone 03 7 BTN SET 7 buttons phone 04 6 BTN SET 6 buttons phone 05 28 BTN SET 28 buttons phone 06 18 BTN SET 18 buttons phone 07 8 BTN SET 8 buttons phone 08 38 BTN SET 38 buttons phone 09 21 BTN SET 21 buttons phone 10 14 BTN SET 14 buttons phone 11 LARGE SET Large LCD phone 12 7 BTN LCD 7 buttons LCD phone 13 0 BTN LCD 0 button LCD phone 14 NONE not used DEFAULT DATA 2 286 3501 3522 SLT 3401 3440 21 BTN SET Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 822 3501 PORT TYPE Display shows SLT 2 Enter virtual extension number 3501 PORT TYPE OR SLT Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL PORT TYPE Select all ports SLT 3 Enter virtual extension type 3501 PORT TYPE OR SLT Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advan
30. OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ABBREVIATION AC ACD ALG AME AMI AOM AP BGM BRI BWBS CA CCBS CCNR CID CLI COM COS CPLD CRC CR Mode CSU CTI CWBS Samsung Business Communications Authentication Authorization and Accounting Alternating Current Automatic Call Distribution Application Level Gateway Answering Machine Emulation Alternate Mark Inversion Add On Module Access Point Background Music Basic Rate Interface Basic Wireless Base Station Access Point Call Agent Call Completion to Busy Subscriber Cell Completion on No Reply Caller Identification Call Line Identification Communication Class Of Service Complex Programmable Logic Device Cyclic Redundancy Code Constant Resistance Mode Communication Service Unit Computer Telephony Integration Combo Wireless Base Station Access Point DID DECT DGP DHCP DLI DND DPIM DSP DSU DTMF E amp M EMI ESM GARP GK GVRP HDLC HLR HTML HTTP IDS IGMP IMAP IN SCP IOM Digital Adapter Subscriber Loops Direct Inward Dialling Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications Digital Phone Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Digital Line Interface Do Not Disturb Door Phone Interface Module Digital Signal Processor Data Service Unit Dual Tone Multi Frequency Ear amp Mouth Electro Magnetic Interference Expanded Switch Module Generic
31. Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY SYSTI EM IP ADDR 155 5 All So SNES DH ASS IP ADDR 165 213 ST e dE EM IP ADDR 1 821546 5 SYST EM GATEWAY LGS 5 AILS Die d SYST EM GATEWAY 192 168 001 001 SYST EM R ESTART YOU SURE NO SYST EM R ESTART ARE YOU SURE NO 2 299 CHAPTER 2 831 MGI PARAMETERS This MMC provides mean to configure the Internet Protocol IP addressing of the MGI card s in the system No Parameter Description 0 IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address for the MGI card 1 GATEWAY Specifies the designated IP gateway address used for contacting IP devices beyond the local subnet 2 SUB MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP devices subnet that are within direct reach of the MGI without having to go through the designated network IP gateway 3 IP TYPE Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private network 4 PUBLIC IP The MGI will originate communications to IP phones and VoIP connections outside the local network using this IP address If this IP address sets 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 or default value then this MGI card uses private IP only See System IP Type on MMC 830 5 PU
32. Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued No Category Description 1 USABLE FEATURE No COS Default Description 20 FEATURE YES Transfer button 21 FLASH YES Trunk flash 22 FOLLOW ME YES Call forward follow me 23 FORWARD YES Call forwarding 24 FWDTOVMS YES Call forward to SVM 800 25 GRP YES Group in out 26 HOLD YES Hold 27 HOTLINE YES Hot line and Off hook selec tion 28 INTERCOM YES Intercom call 30 MESSAGE YES Message 31 MM PAGE YES Meet me page 32 NEW CALL YES New call 33 OHVAED YES Receive Off hook voice an nouncement 34 OHVAING YES Make Off hook voice an nouncement 35 ONEA2 YES 1A2 emulation 36 OPERATOR YES Call to Operator 37 OUT TRSF YES Outgoing transfer 38 OVERRIDE NO Barge In 39 PAGE 0 YES Page zone 0 Paging 40 PAGE 1 YES Page zone 1 Paging 41 PAGE 2 YES Page zone 2 Paging 42 PAGE 3 YES Page zone 3 Paging 43 PAGE 4 YES Page zone 4 Paging 44 PAGE 5 YES Page zone 5 Paging 45 PAGE 6 YES Page zone 6 Paging 46 PAGE 7 YES Page zone 7 Paging 47 PAGE 8 YES Page zone 8 Paging 48 PAGE 9 YES Page zone 9 Paging 49 PAGE YES Page zone Paging 51 PICKUP YES Call pickup 52 PRB YES Privacy Release and Bridge Samsung Business Communications 2 193 CHAPTER 2 continued
33. Select the usable RF channel Maximum six channels can be used for a system Default RF channel 1 6 11 Used to change the TX POWER of all WBS Default LEVEL 1 4 Used to clear registration information of all WBS Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY WLAN SYSTEM ID WBS24 WLAN SYSTEM ID WBS24 WLAN SYSTEM ID WBS24 WLAN SYSTEM ID WBS24 WLAN SYSTEM KEY 00000 WLAN 15 DNS IP Qo Os OW 0 WLAN 2ND DNS IP QU OW 0 WLAN 2ND WBS IP Ws o WLAN CHANNEL Chet akg Qui WLAN WBS TX PWR DEFAULT WLAN CLR WBSREG ARE YOU SURE NO 2 327 CHAPTER 2 2 328 5 6 Set the items below at WBS24 menu The se lected WBS is as set in MMC 849 SELECT AP TYPE option i e CWBS COMBO WBS BWBS BASIC WBS Register the WBS24 IP ADDRESS Register the WBS24 NET MASK Register the WBS24 GATEWAY Displays the WBS24 MAC ADDRESS Displays the WBS24 VERSION Displays the WBS24 STATUS Register the WBS24 RF CHANNEL The WBS RF channel must be selected from the pre assigned RF channels in WLAN RF CHANNELS Register the WBS24 TX POWER Default LEVEL 1 4 Used to clear the WBS parameter Set the items below at the menu Register the RE TRANS 1 The initial re transmission time if no answer b
34. 201 BGM SOURCE Display shows current setting BGM SOURCE NONE 2 Dial phone number e g 205 205 BGM SOURCE OR BGM SOURCE NONE Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor OR ALL BGM SOURCE Select all stations BGM SOURCE 3 Enter source number e g 371 205 BGM SOURCE OR BGM SOURCE 371 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE Samsung Business Communications 2 81 CHAPTER 2 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE Assigns a Music On Hold source to phones There is one internal music source external music source The default directory numbers for the music sources is 371 CONDITIONS To use an external sound source connect the corresponding port of the MOH source to the external sound source of MISC port of MP10 11 card DEFAULT DATA TONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 309 201 STN MOH Display shows current setting MOH SOURCE NONE 2 Dial phone number e g 205 205 STN MOH OR MOH SOURCE NONE Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor OR ALL STN MOH Pre
35. 4 DIAL 5 J K L 5 DIAL 6 6 DIAL 7 P Q R 7 DIAL 8 T U V P 8 DIAL 9 X Y 2 9 DIAL The button can be used for the following special characters space amp T Yo T gt 1 C an is Ze gt M DEFAULT DATA NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 9 CHAPTER 2 1 2 3 4 Press Transfer button and enter 104 Display shows Dial station number e g 205 OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter the station name using the procedure described above and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 10 DISPLAY 201 STN NAME 205 STN NAME 205 STN NAME SAM SMITH Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 105 STATION SPEED DIAL Allows the system administrator or technician to assign phone numbers to a station s per sonal speed dial locations CONDITIONS Each station may have up to 50 locations or bins assigned to it in MMC 606 Assign Speed Block The speed dial bins are numbered 00 49 Each assigned phone number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to
36. ALL TRK RELS RELEASE eal he 704 TRK RELS RE LE AS Boe de Nu 2 107 CHAPTER 2 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE Allows the system administrator to select which Music On Hold MOH source can be heard on each trunk There is one internal music source external music source 371 CONDITIONS To use an external sound source connects the corresponding port of the to the misc port of MP10 11 card DEFAULT DATA TONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 408 701 TRK MOH Display shows current setting MOH TONE AA TONE 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 TRK MOH OR MOH TONE AA TONE Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL TRK MOH Select all MOH AA 3 Enter source number e g 371 705 TRK MOH OR MOH 371 AA TONE Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 756 ASSIGN VMMOH 2 108 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 409 TRUNK STATUS READ This is a READ ONLY MMC Allows the status of trunks to be read in a format that will enable the servicing personnel to quickly identify the ownership and position of a trunk
37. Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 40 MJD08 Blue Alarm Rec A blue alarm condition has been cleared Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 41 MJD09 Bit Error Alarm Alarm is activated when the error rate exceeds 1 x 10 errors Note 1x10 is threshold for minor alarm 1 x 10 is threshold for major alarm errors on E1 PRI or BRI Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 42 MJD10 NTWRK Event An Implausible event has occurred on the PRI or BRI Network digital line Protocols do not match or sub scriber ID mismatch Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 43 MJD11 SPID Init Error The BRI received an error from the network Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz 44 MJD12 SPID Init Rec The BRI has recovered from an error on the network Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz 45 MJD13 LPBK Error Internal on demand loopback failed Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz 46 MJD14 LPBK Recovery Internal on demand loopback test passed Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz 47 MJD15 BRI DL Unavail A BRI data link is out of service Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz 48 MJD16 BRI DL Recovery A BRI data link is back in service Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz 49 MJD17 RAM Error An error has occurred in the TEPRI or BRI card RAM Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued
38. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS 2 220 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 719 IDLE DISPLAY This program allows you to enter guidance data to be displayed on large LCD phones ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 2 3 4 Press Transfer button and enter 719 Display shows Enter the number of the line on a large LCD phone 01 12 on which guidance data is to be displayed OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter guidance data via dial keypad and press Right Soft button to save and move to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 120 LARGE LCD OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications IDL IDL DISPLAY E DISPLAY 01 E DISPLAY 02 E DISPLAY 02 ELCOME TO ABC 2 221 CHAPTER 2 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING Provides a tool for duplicating key assignments from one phone to another This can be done on a per station basis or on all stations but not on a group of stations A limitation is that the original and target phones must be of the same type the same number of buttons DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Tran
39. RF CHANNEL Set a RF CHANNEL value that can be used by USE CH 1 01 WBS USE CH 2 06 USE CH 3 11 USE CH 4 00 USE CH 5 00 USE CH 6 00 Samsung Business Communications 2 325 CHAPTER 2 continued No Parameter Description Default 07 VERSION WLAN module version Version 20 MAXAP CH Set the maximum channel number of AP 00 21 WLAN SWTCH Support WLAN switch function DISABLE SIP PARAMETER No Parameter Description Default ms RE TRANS T1 When using an unreliable transmission protocol such as UDP retransmission is required when no reply is received RE TRANS T1 TIME is the initial retrans mission interval defined in RFC2543 500 RE TRANS T2 Maximum retransmission interval defined in RFC 2543 4000 RE TRANS T4 GEN RING TM INV RING TM RFC 2543 defines this parameter for various pur poses For example this parameter can be used as the time waited by User Agent Server after receiving ACK message in an unreliable transmission proto col When using an unreliable transmission protocol the server cannot be sure if the client has received the last reply Thus the server must retransmit the reply for this length of time until it receives the requested retransmission For example this parameter can be used as the waiting time after sending 200 OK for INFO When using an unreliable transmission protocol
40. This parameter determines whether silence suppression is used This prevents transmission during the silence period of a call and conserves bandwidth when en abled DISABLE 03 IN FILTER This option selects input filtering of the DSP This should always be set to ENABLE ENABLE 04 OUT FILTER This option selects output filtering of the DSP This should always be set to ENABLE ENABLE 05 INPUT GAIN PCM input gain value of DSP The range is 31 dB 32 dB 0 63 This set the quality of PCM voice from the VoIP DSP to the site Default is 32 0 dB 32 06 VOICE VOL This value selects the voice volume The range is 31 dB 31 dB 0 63 32 0 dB 08 JITTER OPT This is a scale value that introduces a intentional buffer delay of the transmission of VoIP packets gener ated by the MGI card This value determines whether the focus is on packet loss or packet delay The range is 00 12 09 MIN JITTER Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment The range is 010 300 ms 30 ms 10 MAX JITTER Decides the maximum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment The range is 010 300 ms 150 ms 11 FAX ECM This option selects retry of Fax over IP if errors are de tected ENABLE 12 MAX FAX CNT Samsung Business Communications This is the maximum number of channels that can be simultaneously used for Fax over IP The ran
41. ated by the IP phone This value can be left at the default value 00000 if your network infra structure does not support this method of bandwidth management This data uses DOWN SYSTEM DATA only see 3 below All bits 0 3 DOWN Determines whether system wide data or individual phone data is used for DSP control of IP based phones a SYSTEM DATA System wide data will be used MMC 841 b PHONE DATA Individual phone data will be used MMC 840 SYS DATA 06 ITP TX GAIN HSET Sets IP based phone Handset TX gain value of each level Depends on country 07 2 322 ITP RX GAIN HSET Sets IP based phone Handset RX gain value of each level Depends on country Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued No Option Description Default 08 ITP TX GAIN MIC Sets IP based phone MIC gain value of each level Depends on country 09 ITP RX GAIN SPKR Sets IP based phone SPKR gain value of each Depends on level country 10 ITP VERS Sets IP based phone software upgrade option with UPGRADE the system 0 TYPE MMC a MMC COMMAND IP based phone soft COMMAND ware upgraded manually in MMC 840 b PHONE CON IP based phone software upgraded automatically when phone con nected c AUTO TIME IP based phone software up graded automatically at set time 1 START HHMM IP based phone software 0000 Disable auto
42. in MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS in order to forward a call to an external number If only FORWARD is set to ON calls can only be forwarded to internal numbers Default OFF DEFAULT DATA NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 5 CHAPTER 2 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 102 201 FORWARD Display shows 0 FORWARD CANCEL 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 FORWARD OR 0 FORWARD CANCEL Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 0 5 to select forward type 205 FORWARD OR 1 ALL CALL NONE Press Volume button to select forward type e g 1 and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Dial destination number e g 201 205 FORWARD OR 1 ALL CALL 201 Press Volume button to select destination and press Right Soft button to move cursor 5 Dial 1 for YES 0 for NO 205 FORWARD OR CURRENTLY SET YES Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 2 6 ASSIGN STATION COS SYSTEM TIMERS STATION WIDE TIMERS ASSIGN COS CONTENTS STATION KEY PROGRAMMING SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 103 SET ANSWER MODE
43. nete ge 2 102 404 TRUNK NAME 2 104 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER 2 105 406 TRUNK RING 551 eee eee enters innen tenia 2 106 407 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE 4 2 107 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH ete innen terret entes 2 108 409 TRUNK 5 dici e ria dn 2 109 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK 2 111 Samsung Business Communications IX 412 ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL 2 112 414 MPDIPRS SIGNAE A ert 2 113 415 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON 2 115 417 EV PREGRGCA OPTION c 2 116 418 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART 2 117 419 BRI OPTIONS 2 118 IE Bde 2 122 421 MSN DIGIT m 2 124 422I TRUNK COS cem tite tet etes netto t Cada cs eter Runs 2 125 423 S T MODE c rtr ete rite Dh te tenen vei ete cet i ne ecd ia ee nts 2 127 424 BRI SO MAPPING itte pint eget vaut 2 128 425 CID TRUNKS ntt terr rrt tiet reete traria ni
44. press Right Soft button 3 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 MMC 701 Samsung Business Communications ASSIGN STATION COS ASSIGN COS CONTENTS CHAPTER 2 207 ASSIGN VM AA PORT Enables SLI ports to be designated as NORMAL or VM AA VM AA ports receive digits and also receive a true disconnect signal on completion of a call Only SLI cards not key set daughter boards support disconnect signal Do not make VM AA ports data this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration VM AA ports have the equivalent of data protect written in the program and are protected against tones When using the MMC 207 This MMC is not used to assign voice mail card ports Voice mail card ports are assigned as voice mail ports automatically when the system detects an SVM 400 or SVMi 20 card DEFAULT DATA NORMAL PORT ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 207 209 VMAA PORT NORMAL PORT Display shows 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 VMAA PORT OR NORMAL PORT Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 1 or 0 to select port type 205 VMAA PORT 1 VMAA 0 NORMAL VMAA PORT OR Press Volume button to select type and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR P
45. 1 6 1 Phone Function The MMC programs related to the function of a phone that is connected with the Office Serv 7100 are as follows Table 1 10 Phone Function Programming list MMC Program No Program Description MMC 100 STATION LOCK MMC 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE MMC 102 CALL FORWARD MMC 103 SET ANSWER MODE MMC 104 STATION NAME MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL MMC 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC 108 STATION STATUS MMC 109 DATE DISPLAY MMC 110 STATION ON OFF MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE MMC 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK MMC 114 PHONE VOLUME MMC 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE MMC 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY Samsung Business Communications 1 23 CHAPTER 1 1 6 2 Networking Function The MMC programs related to the function of networking are as follows Table 1 11 MMC Program No Networking Function Programming list Program Description MMC 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID MMC 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK MMC 822 SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE MMC 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS MMC 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION MMC 825 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION MMC 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETER MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS MMC 840 IP PHONE INFORMATIONES MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS 1 6 3 VoIP Function The MMC programs related to the function of VoIP
46. 14 A Append after dialling string 14 DIGIT STRING KEY Insert String Digit String delete Append String DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 713 LCR MODIFY 001 Display shows NOF DEL DGT 00 2 Enter index number e g 005 LCR MODIFY 005 OR Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter number of digits to delete OR Press Right Soft button to skip step and move cursor to next step 4 Enter digits to be inserted e g 10288 OR Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store information and advance to next step Samsung Business Communications NOF LCR NOF LCR DEL DGT 00 MODIFY 005 DEL DGT 01 MODIFY 005 T0295 2 211 CHAPTER 2 RELATED ITEMS 2 212 5 Enter digits to be appended e g 45678 LCR MODIFY 005 OR Ag Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store infor mation and return to step 2 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC MMC 310 MMC 710 MMC 711 MMC 712 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE LCR DIGIT TABLE LCR TIME TABLE LCR ROUTE TABLE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION Assigns an incoming DID call to a specific ring plan destination It also provides a call w
47. 2 3 4 5 Press Transfer button and enter 400 Display show Dial trunk number e g 704 OR Press Volume button to select trunk OR Select all trunks and press Right Soft button to move cursor to options Dial option number from above list OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF OR Press Volume button to select ON OFF and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY 701 TRK ON OFF 1A2 EMULATE OFF 704 TRK ON OFF 1A2 EMULATE OFF ALL TRK ON OFF 1A2 EMULATE 704 ON OFF FORWARD ON 704 ON OFF FORWARD OFF 2 99 CHAPTER 2 401 TRUNK LINE PBX LINE Used to select the mode of the trunk lines CO LINE or PBX LINE If PBX mode is chosen this allows PBX access codes to be recognized thus allowing more complete toll restriction call barring This mode is assigned on a per trunk basis DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS CO LINE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 401 701 PBX LINE Display shows CO LINE 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 PBX LINE OR CO LINE Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbe
48. 823 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK MMC 821 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS MMC 825 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP MMC 600 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK MMC 608 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME MMC 507 ASSIGN RING TYPE MMC 208 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK MMC 606 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION GROUP MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE MMC 309 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE MMC 604 ASSIGN STATION STATION USE MMC 317 1 16 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Table 1 9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list continued MMC Name MMC No ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID MMC 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK MMC 826 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MMC 705 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP MMC 603 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL MMC 412 ASSIGN TRUNK TRUNK USE MMC 428 ASSIGN UA DEVICE MMC 203 ASSIGN VMMOH MMC 756 ASSIGN VM AA PORT MMC 207 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER MMC 704 AUTHORIZATION CODE MMC 707 AUTO RECORD MMC 752 BARGE IN TYPE MMC 206 BRANCH GROUP MMC 319 BRI amp PRI CARD RESTART MMC 418 BRI OPTIONS MMC 419 BSI RF CARRIER MMC 747 BRI SO MAPPING MMC 424 CALL COST MMC 508 CALL FORWARD MMC 102 CALL LOG BLOCK MMC 609 CALLER ID DISPLAY MMC 119 CALLING PARTY NUMBER MMC 323 CARD PRE INSTALL MMC 806 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE MMC 201 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE MMC 202 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE MMC 801 CHANGE USER PASSCODE M
49. A Caution Indication of a general caution Restriction Indication for prohibiting an action for a product Instruction Indication for commanding a specifically required action Samsung Business Communications V A WARNING Before using the Auto Record feature Before using the Auto Record feature make sure that you are not violating any laws Samsung is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature N CAUTION CALL COST MMC 508 Changing this value when there is a call progress may result in an inaccurate call cost This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk card When changing the MMC 506 807 and 812 A MMC 506 510 807 and 812 should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor For the national version OfficeServ 7100 is designed to comply with the stan dards of the corresponding country Therefore if you need to use MMC 812 Set Country Code please consult your dealer for advice Compliance with the National Version Standards VI Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION PUPP OSC ois erect nonc E 1 Console
50. Alarm Data Tel number or Cx Syy Pzz 2 343 CHAPTER 2 DEFAULT DATA ALL OFF ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 852 01 MJAO1 ACT OFF Display shows POR Restart 2 Enter desired Alarm Display number e g 64 64 MNF01 ACT OFF OR Card Out Press Volume buttons to select desired option and press Right Soft button to advance the cursor 3 To select if the alarm is active press 1 for 64 MNF01 ACT ON YES and 0 for NO Card Out An entry will return the cursor to step 2 OR Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING MMC 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY 2 344 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY This MMC is used to place stations trunks and common resources equipment in a mainte nance busy condition This can be used to isolate suspected intermittent problems Stations placed in maintenance busy will behave like a station in DND when called The calling sta tions display will show MADE BUSY Stations receiving DID or E amp M type calls will re ceive a DND No more calls tone The station display will still function with st
51. Display shows 2 Enter the tone number 0 6 e g 1 OR Press Volume button to select tone number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial a number for external tone source e g 3762 OR Press Volume button to select tone number and press Right Soft button to store 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 164 DISPLAY BUSY TONE TONE DIAL TONE TONE DIAL TONE 3762 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 515 DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT Defines up to 10 summertime periods The system time will automatically increase by an hour at 2 a m on the assigned Start date and will automatically decrease by an hour at 3 a m on the assigned End date Dates are entered as follows NO entry number 01 10 YY year last 2 digits e g 05 for 2005 START start date MMDD e g 0801 is 1st August END end date MMDD e g 0910 is 10th September For example the entry might be NO YY START END 01 05 3103 2710 DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 2 3 4 Press Transfer button and enter 515 Display shows Dial 01 10 to select entry number e g 01 OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter dates as described above Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker butt
52. EURO 24B NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 48B AOM NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 64B AOM NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO iDCS 28D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO iDCS 18D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO iDCS 8D YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DS 5012L NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO DS 5014D NO NO YES NO NO NO NO NO DS 5021D NO NO NO YES NO NO NO NO DS 5007S NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO DS 5014S NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO DS 5038S NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO IP Phone NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES 2 88 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 316 COPY STATION USABLE Provides a tool for copying station trunk use assignments in MMC 304 from one station user group to another This can be done on a station use group basis or for all station use groups Use groups are set up in MMC 614 DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 316 001 COPY USABLE Display shows FROM NONE 2 Enter station use group number e g 005 005 COPY USABLE OR FROM NONE Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter station use group number to copy from 005 COPY USABLE Cursor returns to step 2 FROM 003 OR Press Volume button to make selection 4 Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION TRUNK USE MMC 614 STATION TRUNK USE GROUP Samsu
53. MMC No MMC Name MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES MMC 839 SIP USER MMC 840 IP PHONE INFORMATION MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS MMC 845 WLAN PARAMETERS MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION MMC 848 WLAN IP MAC LIST MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION MMC 850 SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS MMC 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY MMC 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME MMC 856 TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS MMC 857 VIRTUAL CABINET MMC 859 HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS MMC 863 NODE INFO MMC 890 INITIALIZE PORT Samsung Business Communications CHAPTER 1 1 5 Programming List by Name This programming list is arranged alphabetically Table 1 9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list MMC Name MMC No ACCOUNT CODE MMC 708 ALARM AND MESSAGE MMC 116 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK MMC 112 ALARM REPORTING MMC 851 ALLOW CALLER ID MMC 312 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE MMC 612 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING MMC 611 ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE MMC 209 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE MMC 308 ASSIGN BOSS SECRETARY MMC 303 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS MMC 701 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME MMC 505 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK MMC 410 ASSIGN EXTENSION TRUNK USE MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE MMC 605 ASSIGN FORCED CODE MMC 305 ASSIGN LOUD BELL MMC 205 ASSIGN MAILBOX MMC 751 ASSIGN NETWORK COS MMC
54. NONE GROUP BUSY NONE Determines which tone source will be connected when all AA group members are busy This destination can be NONE TONE or external music on hold If NONE is set then dial tone is connected if TONE is set then hold tone is connected ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 224 WAKE UP ANNOUNCE Display shows AA GROUP NONE 2 DialO 1 or2 for option select WAKE UP ANNOUNCE OR AA GROUP NONE Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button Samsung Business Communications 2 69 CHAPTER 2 3 Enter the AA group number WAKE UP ANNOUNCE OR AA GROUP 520 Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 70 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 300 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER STATION Allows the following features to be enabled disabled on a per station basis No Option Default Description 00 ACCESS DIAL ON Determines whether a user can select a trunk or trunk group by dialling its Directory Number DN This selec tion should be turned off when using LCR 01 MICROPHONE ON Allows phones to be used in speakerphone mode 02 OFF HOOK RING ON Will allow a short burst of ring t
55. OR 1305 201 9301 Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to move cursor to the next ring plan OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to previous step 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS 2 74 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 302 PICKUP GROUPS Allows the assignment of stations into call pickup groups There is a maximum of 20 pickup groups An unlimited number of members can belong to each group Stations can only be in one pickup group at any given time DEFAULT DATA NO PICKUP GROUPS ASSIGNED ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 302 201 PICKUP GRP Display shows PICKUP GRP NONE 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 PICKUP GRP OR PICKUP GRP NONE Use Volume button to select station number and press Right Soft button OR ALL PICKUP GRP Select all stations PICKUP GRP 3 Dial pickup group number e g 05 205 PICKUP GRP OR PICKUP GRP 05 Press Volume button to select group number 4 Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 to enter more stations OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 OR Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER M
56. PBA PCB PCM PLL POP3 PPP PPPoE PRI PRS PSTN PSU Q SIG QoS RCM RIP RTCP RTP SCM SCP SDP SG SGCP SIGTRAN SIO SIP Off Premises Extension Port Address Translation Printed circuit Board Assembly Printed Circuit Board Pulse Code Modulation PC based Man Machine Communication Phase Locking Loop Post Office Protocol version 3 Point to Point Protocol Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet Primary Rate Interface Polarity Reverse Detection Public Switched Telephone Network Power Supply Unit Q Signalling Quality of Service R2 CID Module Routing Information Protocol Real time Transmission Control Protocol Real time Transmission Protocol Switch and Conference Module Signal Control Processor Session Description Protocol Signalling Gateway Simple Gateway Control Protocol Signalling Transport Serial Input Output Session Initiation Protocol Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide SLI SLT SMDR SMTP SoL STA STP SVMi TAPI TCAP TCP TEPRI TRK UA UAC UART UAS UCD UDP UPS USB VDIAL VLAN VoIP VPM VPN Samsung Business Communications Single Line Interface Single Line Telephone Station Message Detail Recording Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Server optimized Linux Spanning Tree Algorithm Signalling Transfer Point Samsung Voice Mail integrated Telephony Application Programming Interface Transmission Control Appl
57. TOLL RESTRICTION MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER 2 206 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE The LCR DIGIT TABLE contains all numerical digits for the completion of outgoing call placement This table works in conjunction with LCR ROUTE TABLE LCR TIME TA BLE and LCR MODIFY DIGITS TABLE There is a maximum 2000 entries with a digit string length of 10 numerical digits This system automatically maintains entered digit strings in numerical order The characters and are also accepted for use with feature codes DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 710 2 3 4 5 6 Display shows Dial LCR entry e g 0005 OR Press Volume button to select entry and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter LCR digit string via the dial keypad and press Right Soft button OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 1 Enter digit length max 31 Cursor will move to RT route selection Enter RT 01 32 Valid entry will return you to step 1 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY LCR DIGIT 0001 DIGIT LCR DIGIT 0005 DEEP B LCR DIGIT 0005 DIGIT 305426 LCR DIGIT 0005 10 RT 01 LCR DIGIT
58. This program must be included in MC card to start the system Ap10v014 pkg Appication program MP and VM module is included in this package Dr10v014 pkg This package includes SP MGI and other drivers Rd10v014 pkg RAMDISK program Ws10v014 pkg WEB UI program vm use tar VM prompt vm uk tar DEFAULT DATA NONE 2 282 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION 1 2 3 DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 819 Startup ini Display shows z 512 bytes Press Volume button to confirm program type Cs10v101 pkg sz 14418432 bytes Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 283 CHAPTER 2 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID This MMC is used to assign the system link ID for PRI and VoIP networking Up to 100 link IDs can be entered including SELF ID In addition each Link ID is associated with the IP address and IP address type of the MCP card for that system Option Description LINK ID System ID for networking feature SIGNAL G W System IP address for VoIP networking IP TYPE System IP address type for VoIP networking SELF system IP address type determines SYSTEM IP TYPE in MMC 830 CONDITIONS SELF represents self node and must be set to use the networking function Ite
59. and options are played to callers and can change automatically if enabled in the card ac cording to the settings in this MMC This MMC contains either a DAY or NIGHT instruction for each Ring Plan DEFAULT DATA ALL RING PLANS DAY ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 758 VM DAY NIGHT Display shows RING 1 DAY 2 Enter ring plan number VM DAY NIGHT OR RING 3 DAY Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 0 for day or 1 for night VM DAY NIGHT OR RING 3 DAY Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME 2 256 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 759 CLI RINGING This MMC assigns a specific CID number received from the central office to a specific ring plan destination Also allows you to reject a specific CID number and assign priorities There are 9 priority levels priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest It also allows you to select the ring tone heard at a phone when called by a specific CID number There is also a cadence control option to perform a similar function for SLTs There are eight ring tones available along with a Follow Station NO option There are five cadences and a Follow Station opti
60. or the call is cleared if it is programmed to reject the call If the incoming called party number does not have a matching entry in the MSN table MMC 406 ringing destination is alerted or the call is optionally released You can give each MSN number to a specific station and you can select the call waiting op tion when a destination is busy the incoming call must be cleared or camped on to the sta tion which is alerted to the call CONDITIONS DEFAULT DATA 1 6 NONE CW YES OPT ACCEPT ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 421 Display shows 2 Enter trunk number e g 704 OR Press Volume button to scroll through ISDN ports and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter the location 1 8 e g 4 OR Press Volume button to select location and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter digits to be translated e g 4603881 via 2 124 BRI card must be installed in the system Otherwise the NO BRI CARD message is displayed For each BRI access two adjacent ports are assigned You need only change the value for one of the two ports the value for the other port will be changed automatically dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move to the destination selection Max Digit is 12 DISPLAY 701 MSN DGT 1 DGT 704 MSN DGT 1 DGT 704 MSN DGT 4 Dem 704 MSN DGT 4 DGT 4603881 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming
61. returns to step 2 with new value 060 SEC gt 250 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 146 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 502 STATION WIDE TIMERS Allows certain station timer values to be changed on a per station basis or for all stations No Item Description 0 NOANS FWD This timer controls how long the station will ring before Forward on No Answer takes place 1 250 sec 1 DTMF DUR This timer governs the duration of DTMF digits which are transmitted to an external VMS system port This can be used when a VMS system fails to recognise the default DTMF digit duration being transmitted from the SLT port 100 9900 ms 2 F DGT DELY This timer will be valuable for the system administrator to insert a suitable delay before generating DTMF digits for In Band integration 100 9900 ms 3 OFFHK SEL This timer controls the grace period before placing an internal external call as programmed in MMC 306 0 250 sec 4 EFWD DELAY This timer controls the External Call Forward feature which will allow a station to ring before the call is placed on external call forwarding 1 250 sec 5 CC RNG DLY CONDITIONS NONE DEFAULT DATA If a station does not answer an incoming call within this time other sta tions with a CC key for that station will ring
62. the client cannot verify if the server has received the ACK returned to the server for the INVITE Final Re sponse The client waits for this length of time after sending the ACK for the Final Response 5000 6000 1000 GEN NO RESP Waiting time before cancelling SIP related Request 5000 INV NO RESP Waiting time before cancelling SIP INVITE Request 6000 REQ RETRY Waiting time for receiving final response for SIP re lated Request 5000 PROVISIONAL DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION 2 326 On receiving Provision Response the User Agent must wait for this length of time until Timeout 180000 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION 1 2 3 4 Press Transfer button and enter 845 When the cursor is on WLAN press Volume button and select WLAN WBS or SIP Press Right Soft button to move to the SYSTEM ID When the cursor is below SYSTEM ID press Volume button to select the setting menu for WLAN Set the items below at the WLAN menu SYSTEM ID Use the Soft button to move the cursor and enter the new WLAN SYSTEM ID to register Press Soft button and proceed to next register status Register the SYSTEM KEY Register the 1 DNS server IP Register the 2 DNS server IP Register the 2 WBS IP Select the voice codec Select from G711a G711u and G729 CODEC Numbers are given from 1 to 4 based on priority
63. 0 ALARM REM 5 The number of times that an alarm reminder will CNTER ring a station before cancelling RANGE 1 99 1 AUTO RDL 5 The number of times the system will redial an out COUNTER side number after the auto redial feature has been activated RANGE 1 99 2 DISACALL CNTER 99 Sets the maximum number of intercom calls that can be made after accessing a DISA line RANGE 1 99 3 DISALOCK CNTER 3 Number of attempts the system will allow to incor rectly access a DISA line before locking out the DISA line RANGE 99 4 NEWCALL 99 Number of times the system will allow a user to COUNTER signal New Call on a Trunk line during one call RANGE 1 99 5 UCDS VISUAL 0 Used to set the Visual alarm threshold It is trig ALARM gered when the number of calls waiting to be an swered in the UCD group reaches this value RANGE 0 25 6 UCDS AUDIO ALARM 0 Used to set the Audio alarm threshold It is trig gered when the number of calls waiting to be an swered in the UCD group reaches this value RANGE 0 25 7 UCD CS LEVEL 1 0 Provides call wait indication level 1 if number of calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches this value RANGE 0 25 8 UCD CS LEVEL 2 0 Provides call wait indication level 2 if number of DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION Samsung Business Communications calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches this value RANGE 0 25 2 139 CHAPTER 2
64. 0 3 0001 ACCESS NUM OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor e g ACCESS NUM 4 Enter the system node ID 0001 ACCESS NUM Right Soft button to save 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 355 CHAPTER 2 890 INITIALIZE PORT This MMC clears a call process or initializes the database for specific station or trunks This will return the port to default condition DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 890 2 3 4 5 Display shows Enter the station or Trunk line OR Press Volume button to make selection and press the Right Soft button to move cursor Enter 0 to call clear only or 1 to initialize port OR Press Volume button to make selection and press the Right Soft button to move cursor Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO OR Press Volume button to make selection and press the Right Soft button to save and return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 356 DISPLAY ARE YOU SURE NO 202 CALL CLEAR ARE YOU SURE NO 202 DB INITIAL ARE YOU SURE NO 202 DB INITIAL ARE YOU SURE YES Samsung Business Communications
65. 0005 ENGTH 10 RT 01 2 207 CHAPTER 2 711 LCR TIME TABLE This table through the LCR ROUTES allows calls placed at any given time of day to use the least cost trunk route that is available When LCR ROUTE ADVANCE is allowed it is possible for calls to be placed on more expensive trunks on any given time of day There are four possible time entries per day the start time of the next time period is the end time of the previous time period DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 711 TIME SUN A Display shows HHMM 2 Dial day of week SUN SAT e g WED LCR TIME WED A OR HHMM LCRT Press Volume button to make day selection and press Right Soft button 3 Dial time band A D e g B LCR TIME WED B OR HHMM LCRT Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Dial time via keypad 24 hour format e g 0800 TIME WED B Cursor moves to LCRT see MMC 712 HHMM 0800 LCRT 5 Dial time table number 1 4 TIME WED B OR HHMM 0800 LCRT 1 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE 2 208 Samsung Business Commun
66. 1 USE REMOTE VM Assign to use SVMi on remote system 2 REMOTE VM NUMBER Assign to access number of remote SVMi when the Remote VM is used 3 REMOTE CID NUMB Assign to use delete node number when CID number send to SVMi 4 USE REMOTE ATTN Use Attendant on remote system RING 1 6 Y N 5 REMOTE ATTN NUMB Access number of remote Attendant when the remote Atten dant is used RING 1 6 6 SPNET DIGIT SEND Specify by which method dialled digits are sent across the network DEFAULT DATA 2 292 ADD NUMB TO NAME YES USE REMOTE VM NO REMOTE VM NUMBER NONE REMOTE CID NUMB YES USE REMOTE ATTN NO REMOTE ATTN NUMB NONE SPNET DIGIT SEND MGI SIGNALLING Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide DISPLAY DD NUMB TO NAME ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 825 A Display shows YES 2 Dial the option number USE REMOTE OR NO Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO USE REMOTE OR YES Press Volume button to select YES NO and press Right Soft button to mover cursor 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications VM VM 2 293 CHAPTER 2 826 ASSIGN SYS
67. 250 DOOR RING keypad 18901 22500 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 OR Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP 2 60 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 214 DISA ALARM RINGING STATION Assigns the DISA alarm to ring at a specific phone It is recommended that the person who can clear the alarm also receives the notification CONDITIONS e A valid destination can be either a station group or an individual station e The alarm ringing station or group will follow the ring plan time destination DEFAULT DATA ALL RING PLANS 500 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 214 DISA ALARM RING Display shows 18500 28500 2 Enter valid destination number for ring plan DISA ALARM RING e g 217 12217 28500 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Enter valid destination number for another DISA ALARM RING ring plan e g 249 18217 28249 Press Volume button to make selection 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP Samsung Business Communic
68. 3 Dial 0 1 or 2 to change ring mode 205 ANS MODE OR VOICE ANNOUNCE Press Volume button to select ring mode and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE 2 8 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 104 STATION NAME Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a name up to 11 characters to iden tify an individual station ENTERING CHARACTERS Names are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the directory name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter S Now press the number 2 once to get the letter Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing A button toggles between upper case and lower case NOTE Volume Up Down keys When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the Vol ume Down button to move the cursor to the left A space can be entered using these keys COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL 0 lt gt 0 DIAL 1 1 DIAL 2 A B 2 DIAL 3 D E F 3 DIAL 4 G H
69. 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER MMC 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME MMC 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE MMC 708 ACCOUNT CODE MMC 709 TOLL PASS CODE SPECIAL CODE TABLE MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION MMC 715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE MMC 716 UK LCR OPTION MMC 717 UCD AGENT ID MMC 718 MY AREA CODE MMC 719 IDLE DISPLAY MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS 1 12 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Table 1 7 Tables Codes AA DECT and VM list continued MMC No MMC Name MMC 727 SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY MMC 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE MMC 740 STATION PAIR MMC 746 COSTING DIAL PLAN MMC 747 RATE CALCULATION TABLE MMC 750 VM CARD RESTART MMC 751 ASSIGN MAILBOX MMC 752 AUTO RECORD MMC 753 WARNING DESTINATION MMC 754 VM HALT MMC 755 VM ALARM MMC 756 ASSIGN VMMOH MMC 757 VM IN OUT MMC 758 VM DAY NIGHT MMC 759 CLI RINGING MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE MMC 761 TAX RATE SETUP MMC 762 ROOM COST RATE MMC 763 SECOND LCR Samsung Business Communications 1
70. 725 MADE BUSY Press Transfer button to exit RELATED ITEMS MMC 108 STATION STATUS MMC 409 TRUNK STATUS READ 2 136 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 436 TRUNK TMC GAIN Allows loss levels of TMC for analogue trunks to be adjusted on a per trunk basis There are two adjustments available in this MMC TX is the transmission level adjustment of the trunk to the station RX is the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk DEFAULT DATA TX 0 dB RX 0 dB ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 436 701 TMC GAIN Display shows RX 0 dB TX 0 dB 2 Enter desired trunk number e g 705 via the 705 TMC GAIN dial keypad RX 0 0 dB OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL TMC GAIN Select all RX 0 dB TX 0 dB 3 Press Volume button to make selection and 705 TMC GAIN press Right Soft button to move cursor RX 0 dB TX 0 dB 4 Press Volume button to make selection and 701 TMC GAI press Right Soft button to move cursor and RX 0 dB 2 return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 137 CHAPTER 2 437 16TRK GAIN CONTROL Allows gain levels to be adjusted on a per trunk
71. AA PORT MMC 215 VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS MMC 216 VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS MMC 730 AA RECORD GAIN MMC 731 AA RAM CLEAR MMC 732 AA TRANSLATION TABLE MMC 733 AA PLAN TABLE MMC 735 AA USE TABLE MMC 736 AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH MMC 739 ASSIGN AA MOH MMC 750 VM CARD RESTART MMC 751 ASSIGN MAILBOX MMC 752 AUTO RECORD MMC 753 WARNING DESTINATION MMC 754 VM HALT MMC 755 VM ALARM MMC 756 ASSIGN VM MOH MMC 757 VM IN OUT MMC 758 VM DAY NIGHT Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 1 6 7 Diagnosis Function The MMC programs related to the function of diagnosing the system are as follows Table 1 16 Diagnosis Function Programming list MMC Program No Program Description MMC 434 CONNECTION STATUS MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS MMC 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY MMC 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME MMC 890 INITIALIZE PORT 1 6 8 Hotel Function The MMC programs related to the function of a hotel are as follows Table 1 17 Hotel Function Programming list MMC Program No Program Description MMC 221 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION MMC 222 EXTENSION TYPE MMC 433 COST RATE MMC 513 HOTEL TIMER MMC 748 COSTING DIAL PLAN MMC 749 RATE CALCULATION TABLE MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE MMC 761 TAX RATE SETUP MMC 762 ROOM COST RATE Samsung Business Communications 1 27 OfficeServ 7100 Cal
72. ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL 2 202 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE Enables the authorization feature on a per class of service selection There are 500 avail able entries Authorization codes must be 4 10 digits long DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 Press Transfer button and enter 707 Display shows Dial code index number e g 005 OR Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter authorization code minimum of four digits and a maximum of 10 digits via dial keypad e g 1234567890 and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter class of service number 01 30 e g 05 OR Press Volume button to select COS and press Right Soft button to select and return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY AUTHOR CODI E 001 gal AUTHOR E 005 9l AUTHOR CODI 1234567890 AUTHOR CODI E 005 Cz y 1234567890 E 005 CEOs 2 203 CHAPTER 2 708 ACCOUNT CODE DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 708 Display shows 2 Dial code index number e g 005 OR Pre
73. Allows the system administrator to change the answer mode of any phone Each phone can have its answer mode set to one of the following options No Type Description 0 RING MODE The phone will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns Calls are answered by pressing the ANS RLS or SEND button or by lifting the handset 1 AUTO ANSWER MODE After giving a short attention tone the phone will automati cally answer calls on the speakerphone When a Trunk line is transferred to a phone in Auto Answer the screened portion of the call will be Auto Answered but the phone will ring when the transfer is complete if you have not pressed the ANS RLS or SEND button or lifted the handset 2 VOICE ANNOUNCE The phone will not ring After a short attention tone callers can make an announcement but the ANS RLS or SEND but ton or handset must be used to answer calls To answer the C O call automatically EN To answer the C O call automatically set ON the option AUTO ANS CO in NOTE MMC 110 DEFAULT DATA ALL PHONES RING Samsung Business Communications 2 7 CHAPTER 2 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 103 201 ANS MODE Display shows RING MODE 2 Dial phone number e g 205 205 ANS MODE OR RING MODE Press Volume button to select phone and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL ANS MODE Select all phones 2
74. DEPENDS ON PHONE TYPE SHOWN FOR 21D KEY TONE VOL 1 LINE VOLUME 3 SIDETONE VOL 1 SPEAKER VOLUME 14 HANDSET TX 4 NOR LP ATTEN 4 MIC TX LEVEL 3 MIC LP ATTEN 5 NOISE GUARD 8 ACOU DECOUPL 8 NOISE THRES 1 ELEC DECOUPL 8 ALC THRES 7 T R RATIO 2 TX RX THRES 3 R T RATIO 2 TX RX COMP 5 MIN RX VOL 6 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 807 Display shows 2 Enter phone type via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter volume item via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter volume data via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 274 VOL CONTROL US24 KEY TONE VOL 1 VOL CONTROL EU24 KEY TONE VOL 1 VOL CONTROL EU24 SIDETONE VOL 1 VOL CONTROL EU24 HANDSET TX 6 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 810 HALT PROCESSING Used only in the event that all data processing needs to be stopped either in a single cabinet slot or in the entire system DEFAULT DATA PROC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 810 HALT PROCESSING Display shows C ALL S ALL PROC 2 Enter cabinet sele
75. DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 604 INT PAGE ZONE 0 Display shows MEMBER 01 NONE 2 Enter the page zone number 0 4 e g 3 INT PAGE ZONE 3 OR MEMBER 01 NONE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter index number e g 05 via dial keypad INT PAGE ZONE 3 OR MEMBER 05 NONE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter station number e g 205 via dial keypad INT PAGE ZONE 3 OR MEMBER 05 205 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 175 CHAPTER 2 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE Determines which relays will close when one of the four external page zones is accessed DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 605 EXT PAGE ZONE 5 Display shows first page zone EMBER 1 NONE 2 Dial page zone number e g 6 EXT PAGE ZONE 6 OR EMBER 1 NONE Use Volume button to select desired page zone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Dial member number e g 3 EXT PAGE ZONE 6 OR EMBER 3 NONE Use Volume button to select member numbers and
76. Dial code entry number e g 005 AGENT PIN 005 OR ID GRP NONE Press Volume buttons to select number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter ID code via dial keypad e g 1234 and AGENT PIN 005 press Right Soft button to move cursor ID 1234 GRP NONE 4 Enter group number e g 505 AGENT PIN 005 OR ID 1234 GRP 505 Press Volume button to select group and press Right Soft button to select and return to step 2 OR Select all groups 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications 2 219 CHAPTER 2 718 MY AREA CODE This MMC defines the home area code and country code This information is used for caller ID and ISDN calls in defining the area code on incoming calls This MMC removes the local area code to allow callback without digit modifications in LCR DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 718 MY AREA CODE Display shows AREA 2 Enter 0 for COUNTRY or 1 for AREA MY AREA CODE OR AREA Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter area code maximum 4 digits via dial keypad MY AREA CODE e g 2 and press Right Soft button to move AREA 2 cursor back to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit
77. GAIN CONTROL SLT DGP 0 0 TSW GAIN CONTROL SLTOATRK 40 0 TSW GAIN CONTROL SLTOATRK 41 9 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 806 CARD PRE INSTALL Allows the pre programming of a card slot for a specific card type A card inserted into a system will not be recognized by the system until it is enabled using this MMC Cards in stalled using this MMC will not be assigned in the system numbering plan you should use MMC 724 to assign the desired directory numbers to extensions trunks ports or mis cellaneous functions erased When a card is removed and a different type card is inserted If a card is removed and a different card is inserted and this MMC is performed the memory associated with the previous card e g key programming will be modules are changed When a previous card is UNI Board and a current card is the same but the UNI is removed and a UNI card which has different modules is inserted system will recognize automatically So it does not need to preinstall DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 806 Display shows 2 Enter cabinet number via dial keypad e g 1 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Enter slot number via dial keypad e g 6 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Dial 1 for YES to reset ca
78. If the Voice Mail module is halted by using this MMC system has to restart to use the Voice Mail module again At that time RESTART option can be used DEFAULT DATA RESTART ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 754 VM HALT Display shows STATUS RESTART 2 Enter 1 to HALT or 0 to PROC VM HALT OR STATUS RESTART Press Volume button to select 3 If you select 1 to halt display shows VM HALT Press 1 to confirm ARE YOU SURE YES I 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 252 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 755 VM ALARM This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built In Voice Mail It will generate an alarm message in the mailbox defined in MMC 751 whenever the Voice Mail disk drive reaches a threshold The threshold is measured as a percentage of capacity This means that if the MMC is set for 80 the alarm will be generated when the disk exceeds 80 of the available drive space DEFAULT DATA THRESHOLD 80 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 755 VM ALARM Display shows THRESHOLD 80 2 Enter new threshold level e g 70 VM ALARM THRESHOLD 70 3 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 253 CHAPTER 2
79. If the final des tination is not forwarded the call will ring or camp on to the final destination indefinitely To ensure that you do not get a situation where all the call but tons are busy on the final destination it is advisable to make the final destination a group even if the group has only one station in it This timer must be shorter than the overflow timer in MMC 601 If a higher value is entered the display will show invalid entry In the case where a UCD group has the ring next timer set at 000 an unanswered call will rotate evenly among all agents until it is answered The UCD greetings will be heard during this routing process but can be removed by defining the UCD messages in MMC 607 as unrecorded message numbers This will simulate a circular hunt group 06 UCD RECALL TIME After a caller has heard a UCD announcement they will be placed on hold until an agent becomes available or the UCD re call timer expires When the UCD recall timer expires the caller will again hear the UCD announcement The range is 00 99 The default is 10 07 MOH SOURCE This option determines what Music On Hold source callers will be connected to between messages 08 2 180 WRAP UP TIME This option will make a UCD agent unavailable to receive addi tional UCD calls after hanging up from the last one This is to allow agents to complete work associated with the previous call before the next call begins ringing
80. LARGE DGP 0000 ITP REGISTRATION SYS PSWD IDE EUIS IE ILO PSWD 1234 ITP REGISTRATION PSWD 8228 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 845 WLAN PARAMETERS This MMC modifies the WLAN parameters The SYSTEM KEY is used internally to distinguish between systems when registering a terminal The default value is O0000 but this must be changed to another value to enable the use of WLAN terminals In addition the SYSTEM KEY serves as an identification ID when a WLAN terminal connects to the WBS24 The default value of the SYSTEM ID WBS24 must also be changed to another value in order to use multiple systems in one area The DNS setting for WLAN is additionally de scribed in this MMC Set the network configuration for WBS24 by setting the IP assignment Netmask and Gateway These settings should be compatible with the Intranet since the network configu ration setting is essential for data service In addition the RF frequency for WBS24 should be se lected Currently up to 14 frequencies may be selected Session Initiation Protocol SIP variables used for the WBS24 Basic can be defined WLAN PARAMETER No Parameter Description Default 05 CODEC LIST CODEC that can be used for VoIP calls between CODEC 1 G 729 WBS24 and terminal G 711u G 711a G 726 and CODEC 2 NONE G 729 can all be assigned CODEC 3 NONE CODEC 4 NONE 06
81. NOTSET Press Volume button to select alarm and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter alarm time in 24 hour clock format 205 ALM REM 2 e g 1300 for 1pm HHMM 1300 NOTSET Display will automatically advance to step 5 2 30 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 5 Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type 205 ALM REM e g 2 HHMM 1300DAILY OR Press Volume button to select alarm type and press Right Soft button to move cursor 6 Enter message and press Right Soft button to 205 ALM REM return to step 2 Meeting 7 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK Samsung Business Communications 2 31 CHAPTER 2 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change text messages for any sta tion One station can use up to 10 text messages CONDITIONS Only stations allowed to use text messages in MMC 611 can be selected here Large LCD phones are automatically allowed ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME DEFAULT DATA BLANK MESSAGE ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 117 Display shows 2 Dial station number e g 205 OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button t
82. No Option Description 1 AUTO UPDATE TIME Sets enable 1 or disable 0 the system automatically time and date update from ISDN call connection message If sets enable when system receives ISDN call connection message system checks valid data of encapsulated time and date and update system time and date device 2 SYSTEM SPPED BIN Sets max 500 0 or max 950 1 for the maximum number of sys tem speed dial bin 3 IDLE WHEN ENBLOC Decides the state of Large LCD Phone treated as idle or busy when the user of Large LCD Phone is dialling in ENBLOCK mode 4 2LINE ENBLOCK Decides the usage of ENBLOCK mode for 2 line LCD Phone with navigation buttons 7 LP TRK TONE DISC When this option is set to ON loop trunk can be disconnected by detecting busy tone 8 ISDN SS FEATURE Decides whether ISDN SS Supplement Service is used or not 9 SPNET OVERLAP To assign other dial tone OVERLAP by spnet function can be enable 10 SPNET CLI TABLE If network call and this option is set CLI have to be applied by CLI TABLE 11 E LCR TABLE If E LCR call and this option is set CLI have to be applied by CLI TABLE 12 EXTERNAL BGM MOH Backgroud music source can be use internal source or external source In case of external source music source can be sup ported in MISC port Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and
83. ON displays timer for duration of call if AUTO TIMER also set on 15 AUTO ANS CO OFF When ON keyset will automatically answer outside calls through the speakerphone For this to work the keyset must be set to Auto Answer mode in MMC 103 Calls to groups cannot be auto answered 16 ENBLOCK 2LCD OFF Enables Enbloc dialling for 2 Line LCD phones This op tion only works when 2 LINE ENBLOCK option is en abled in MMC 861 17 STN NO RING OFF When ON no tones will be heard when phone rings DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 Press Transfer button and enter 110 Display shows Dial the station number e g 205 OR DISPLAY 201 STN ON OFF AUTO HOLD 205 STN ON OFF AUTO HOLD OFF Press Volume button to select station and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor OR Select all stations Dial option number from above list e g 03 OR 205 HOT KEYPAD STN ON OFF ON Press Volume button to select option and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF OR 201 HOT KEYPAD STN ON OFF JORK Press Volume button to select ON or OFF Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC Samsung Business Communications 2 21 CHAPTER 2
84. OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications 2 315 CHAPTER 2 839 SIP USER This MMC is used to register sip user and password DEFAULT DATA ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 839 129 01 USER NUM Display shows the first table number 2 press Right Soft button to move cursor REG 01 USER NUM 3 Enter registration number 01 100 via dial keypad REG 01 USER NUM OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter table number 0 1 via dial keypad REG 01 USER NUM OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 5 Enter user number or password via dial keypad REG 01 USER NUM OR 2 press Right Soft button to save 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC entry RELATED ITEMS MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS 2 316 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES This MMC is used to select which SYSTEM IP Address PRIVATE or PUBLIC is used to connect other devices via an H 323 or SIP trunk The device that use the PRIVATE IP Ad dress assigned in this MMC the PRIVATE SYSTEM IP Address will be used to connect the device When changing IP When changing any IP address value listed below three digits must be input for eac
85. OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS 2 64 NONE Service consists of External Page DISPLAY 362 RELAY EXTERNAL PAGE 362 ISDN SVC EXTERNAL PAGE 362 RELAY EXTERNAL PAGE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 220 ISDN SERVICE TYPE Assigns the ISDN service type of a single line telephone port Service consists of BC Bearer Capability and HLC High Layer Capability No Type Description BC HLC 0 VOICE Voice service Speech 1 FAX 3 G3 FAX service 3 1 kHz Audio FAX G2 G3 2 AUDIO 3 1 3 1 kHz Audio service 3 1 kHz Audio None 3 MODEM MODEM service 3 1 kHz Audio Telephony DEFAULT DATA VOICE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 220 209 ISDN Svc Display shows VOICE 2 Enter the station number e g 210 210 ISDN svc OR VOICE Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button 3 Select service type 0 3 210 ISDN svc OR AUDIO 3 1 Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 65 CHAPTER 2
86. PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES MMC 838 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD MMC 818 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE MMC 715 PULSE MAKE BREAK RATIO MMC 504 RATE CALCULATION TABLE MMC 747 RBT MESSAGE MMC 326 RELAY TYPE MMC 219 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA MMC 415 RESET SYSTEM MMC 811 ROOM COST RATE MMC 762 S T MODE MMC 423 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 721 SECOND LCR MMC 763 SET ANSWER MODE MMC 103 SET COUNTRY CODE MMC 812 SET H TRK MMC 432 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE MMC 115 SHOW LICENSE MMC 199 SIP OPTIONS MMC 837 SIP USER MMC 839 SLI RING CADENCE MMC 510 MC FILE CONTROL MMC 819 SMDR OPTIONS MMC 725 STATION GROUP NAME MMC 602 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 722 STATION LOCK MMC 100 STATION NAME MMC 104 STATION ON OFF MMC 110 STATION PAIR MMC 740 STATION SPEED DIAL MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME MMC 106 STATION STATUS MMC 108 STATION TRUNK USE GROUP MMC 614 1 20 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Table 1 9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list continued MMC Name MMC No STATION WIDE TIMERS MMC 502 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS MMC 852 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM SIO MODE MMC 804 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS MMC 841 SYSTEM OPTIONS MMC 861 SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY MMC 850 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME MMC 706 SYSTEM TIMERS MMC 501 SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY MMC 727 SYSTEM WIDE COUNTERS MMC 5
87. Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 301 CHAPTER 2 832 VoIP ACCESS CODE Provides a means to apply the Internet Protocol IP address to the VoIP gateway This also assigns the number of channels that can be used for IP faxes TABLE 00 62 Outbound or Inbound table used for specific access codes Usually when the MCP2 card is used a VoIP gateway the Outbound table is used The Inbound table is used to determine the number of digits to receive before processing the call Each table has 63 entries 00 62 No Option Description 0 ACCESS This is the access code that is used once the VoIP gateway is ac cessed this directs a call based on the routing tables used An access code table then references an access code and correlates an IP ad dress to the access code for routing Amaximum of eight digits are available 1 DGT LENGTH This field requests the number of digits that are expected to be received to make up the whole access code 2 DEL LENGTH This is the number of digits to delete after receiving the access code If no digits are deleted the access code will be sent as part of the call to the destination to continue routing 3 INSERT DGT Digit s to insert for routing at the destination This can be used when different numbering plans exist or if a dial 9 access i
88. TELECOMS 4 Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 104 STATION NAME MMC 404 TRUNK NAME MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP 2 172 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 603 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP Allows the assignment of trunks to a specific trunk group or to several trunk groups This is useful in the programming of LCR when more than one trunk is to be in several dialling plans There are two different modes of operation 1 sequential and 2 distribute There are 30 programmable trunk groups with up to 60 members per group Trunk group member from other groups to prevent accidental access One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group If necessary delete the trunk DEFAULT DATA ALL LOOP ISDN TRUNKS 9 ALL TIE TRUNKS 801 ALL VOIP NETWORKING TRUNKS 803 ALL VOIP H 323 TRUNKS 804 ALL VOIP SIP TRUNKS 805 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 603 9 GROUP Display shows MODE SEQUENTIAL 2 Enter valid trunk group e g 9 9 GROUP SEQUENTIAL Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Press Right Soft button to change mode 9 GROUP MEMBER 01 NONE Press Volume button to change
89. TONE OR TES Cas Press Volume button to select ring cadence and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter priority level via dial keypad 705 RING TONE 1 9 or NO Tes Ces WRITING Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE MMC 510 SLI RING CADENCE 2 92 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 319 BRANCH GROUP Assign stations to branch groups There is a maximum of four branch groups When a C O line is ringing at a station other stations assigned the same branch group can answer the in coming call by going off hook MMC 319 This MMC is currently not valid in the UK EU NOTE DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 319 201 BRANCH GRP Display shows BRANCH GRP NONE 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 BRANCH GRP OR BRANCH GRP NONE Press Volume button to select station and use Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL BRANCH GRP Select all stations BRANCH GRP 3 Diala branch group number 01 20 205 BRANCH GRP OR BRANCH GRP 04 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 93 CHAPTER 2
90. The range is 000 250 The default is 010 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued No Option Description 09 AUTO LOG OUT This YES NO option determines if a station will automatically log out of the UCD group when the RING NEXT timer expires This setting will be ignored if the RING NEXT timer is set to 000 10 ALLOUT FINAL This YES NO option determines if calls forward to the UCD final destination when all stations are logged out of the UCD group If no UCD final destination is assigned then the call will discon nect 11 AGENT PIN NO This YES NO option determines if an agent is required to enter an Agent ID when logging on to this group The Agent ID can be entered in MMC 717 12 GROUP BUSY NEXT This YES NO option determines if all agents are busy specifies whether the next port is called immediately during overflow time DEFAULT DATA FIRST MSG 61 SECOND MSG 62 EXIT CODE NONE RETRY COUNT 03 FINAL DEST 500 RING NEXT 30 SEC UCD RECALL 10 SEC MOH SOURCE NONE WRAP UP 10 SEC AUTO LOG OUT ON ALL OUT TO FINAL OFF AGENT PIN NO OFF GROUP BUSY NEXT OFF Samsung Business Communications 2 181 CHAPTER 2 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 607 530 UCD OPTION Display shows FIRST MSG 61 2 Press Volume button to select UCD group or dial 542 UCD OP
91. Voice over Internet Protocol are as 1 24 follows Table 1 12 MMC Program No VoIP Function Programming list Program Description MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS MMC 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE MMC 833 VoIP IP TABLE MMC 834 H 323 OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Table 1 12 VolP Function Programming list continued MMC 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS MMC 836 H 323 GK OPTIONS 1 6 4 WLAN Function The MMC programs related to the function of WLAN Wireless Local Area Network are as follows Table 1 13 WLAN Function Programming list MMC 845 WLAN PARAMETER MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION MMC 848 WLAN IP MAC LIST MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION 1 6 5 LCR Function The MMC programs related to the function of LCR Least Cost Routing are as follows Table 1 14 LCR Function Programming list MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE MMC 763 SECOND LCR Samsung Business Communications 1 25 CHAPTER 1 1 6 6 Auto Attendant Voice Mail Function The MMC programs related to the function of AA Auto Attendant or VM Voice Mail are 1 26 as follows Table 1 15 Auto Attendant Voice Mail Function Programming list MMC Program No Program Description MMC 207 ASSIGN VM
92. and a name in this table no CID name will be displayed The translation table consists of 1000 entries Each entry comprises a telephone number up to 14 digits and a name up to 16 digits ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 728 2 3 4 5 Display shows first entry Dial entry number e g 0005 OR Use Volume button to scroll through entries and press Right Soft button to select entry Enter telephone number and press Right Soft button to advance to name entry OR Enter telephone number and press Left Soft button to return to step 2 Enter associated name and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID MMC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK 2 240 DISPLAY CLIP XLAT 0001 Dems CLIP XLAT 0005 DEN CLIP XLAT 0005 DGT 3054264100 CLIP XLAT 0005 SAMSUNG TELECOM Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 740 STATION PAIR Assigns a secondary station to a phone This secondary station can be a keyset or single line phone The secondary station assumes the Call Forwarding Class of Service LCR Class and DND attributes of the primary station The secondary station will ring when the primary station r
93. and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Enter number of station trunk OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 4 Enter the number of the use group OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION TRUNK USE MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION STATION USE MMC 428 ASSIGN TRUNK TRUNK USE Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY STATION GROUP 201 001 TRUNK GROUP 701 101 TRUNK GROUP WOR 9 io TRUNK GROUP WOR 9 3 2 187 CHAPTER 2 615 MGI GROUP This program assigns designated MGI ports to specific services This allows grading of MGI card s for traffic conditions The MGI ports can be segregated into groups Any en tries made here may be ineffective if conflicting entries exist in MMC 616 No Type Description 0 LOCAL ITP This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones across a private IP network 1 PUB IP ITP This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones on a pub lic IP network 2 VOIP NTWK This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7100 systems across a private IP network 3 PUB IP NTWK This determines what MGI
94. are displayed when SCREEN key is pressed while on a call AOM KEY FIRST If selected extensions assigned to keys are displayed when SCREEN key is pressed while on a call 4 CALENDAR Sets whether to display PREVIOUS screen or CALENDAR screen on LCD when idle 5 AOM CURSOR Sets cursor position on AOM menu screen 01 99 PREV POSI TION DEFAULT DATA IDLE DISPLAY CALENDAR DS KEY DISPLAY TEL NUMBER DIAL MODE ENBLOCK ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 120 Display shows 2 Enter station number e g 203 OR Press Volume button to scroll through stations and press Right Soft button to select a station OR Select all stations and press the Right Soft button 3 Dial the option number from above list e g 1 OR Press Volume button to select the option and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 2 36 DISPLAY 201 IDLE DISP CALENDER 203 IDLE DISP CALENDER ALL IDLE DISP CALENDER 203 DS KEY DSP Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 4 Press Volume button to select display type and press Right 203 DS KEY DSP Soft button EXT NAME 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 719 IDLE DISPLAY Samsung Business Communications 2 37 CHAPTER 2
95. b Multiple callers can hear the announcement s simultaneously c Callers hearing the announcement will be transferred to a free UCD group member agent as soon as the agent becomes available Samsung Business Communications 2 167 CHAPTER 2 0 TYPE contd continued Description d The callers place in queue is always maintained Additional programming for this type of UCD group is in MMC 607 There is a maximum of 20 UCD groups available on a sys tem due to availability of system resources 3 This is used to group a number of AA ports An Auto Atten dant AA card must be installed in the system to do this 4 BI VMS This is the voice mail group for the Built In Voice Mail card 5 MESSAGE Used to group a number of extensions to serve as a message desk or message group When one of the stations in this type of group leaves a message to another station the messaged station will return the message to the message group so any mem ber can answer the call If a station is a member of more than one message group then any message indications made by that station would be for the first numerical message group they are a member of It is not recommended to program stations in to multiple station groups 6 SOSTN GRP This is used to group a number of SO stations for a video conference 7 VMSUCD GRP This is used to collect UCD queuing prompts from the SV
96. basis There are two adjustments available in this MMC TX is the transmission level adjustment of the trunk to the station RX is the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk CONDITIONS This function can be used only when the TRM or trunk card is installed in the system DEFAULT DATA TX 3 RX 3 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 437 701 TRK TYPE 3 Display shows RX 3 98 3 2 Enter desired trunk number e g 705 701 TRK TYPE 3 via the dial keypad RX 3 IRR OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL TRK TYPE 3 Select all RX 3 Tog 3 Press Volume button to select trunk type 1 4 and ALL TRK TYPE 4 press Right Soft button to move cursor e g 4 RX 3 20 8 4 Press Volume button to select RX value 1 6 and ALL TRK TYPE 4 press Right Soft button to move cursor e g 1 RX 1 TX 3 5 Press Volume button to select TX value 1 6 and ALL TRK TYPE 4 press Right Soft button to move cursor e g 5 RX 1 TX 5 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 138 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 500 SYSTEM WIDE COUNTERS Used to set the values of the system counters The counters are listed below with a brief de scription of each No Counter Default Description
97. button to make selection OR Press Hold button to delete bin s 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 184 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING This program allows stations to send text messages to other stations if they are busy or dur ing an OHVA Up to 20 stations can be allowed text messaging DEFAULT DATA e text messaging allowed e ITP 5012L Large LCD keysets are automatically set to USED text messaging al lowed ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 611 201 TMSG STN Display shows NOT USED 100 FREE 2 Enter the number of a station 202 TMSG STN OR NOT USED 100 FREE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Specify whether text messaging will be used or not N USED 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE Samsung Business Communications 2 185 CHAPTER 2 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE This program allows a station to use the Group Conference call feature Up to 20 stations can be allowed this feature Each allowed station can have up to five pre programmed con ference grou
98. button to scroll through BRI numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL S T MODE Select all TRUNK 3 Enter circuit type e g station 727 S T MODE OR STATION Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 424 MMC 418 MMC 419 MMC 421 Samsung Business Communications BRI SO MAPPING BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART BRI OPTIONS MSN DIGIT 2 127 CHAPTER 2 424 BRI SO MAPPING This MMC assigns an ISDN terminal number to a BRI station port CONDITIONS This function can be used only when the BRI card or BRM is installed in the system DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 424 8701 50 MAPPING Display shows first terminal number NONE 2 Dial terminal number 8704 SO MAPPING OR NONE Press Volume button to make selection of terminal numbers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Dial BRI port number 8704 50 MAPPING OR 712 Use Volume button to scroll through ports and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 419 BRI OPTIONS MMC 423 S T MODE 2 128 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Serv
99. button to select DISABLE OR Press Speaker button then Transfer to return to normal display Programming option will time out RELATED ITEMS MMC 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE 2 266 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE Used to change the passcode which allows access to MMC 800 Enable Technician Pro gram from its current value CONDITIONS The passcode is four characters long Each character can be digits 0 9 The current or old passcode is required for this MMC DEFAULT DATA DEFAULT PASSCODE 4321 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 801 TECH PASSCODE NEW CODE _ 2 Enter new passcode TECH PASSCODE zZ EW CODE d ECHER PRPASOCODE 3 Enter new passcode again lt ERIP EE Hd IG HORSE SS CODE 4 If passcode is correct press Right Soft key to continue and enter desired MMC VERIFY SUCCESS H EGHOSEASSCODES If passcode is incorrect 3 DROZ System returns to step 2 H PASSCODE NEW CODE 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM Samsung Business Communications 2 267 CHAPTER 2 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER Allows the System Administra
100. de tates tiet ten 2 277 813 HOTEL OPERATION ite reete ethernet Petre 2 278 815 CUSTOMER DATABASE enne terret rennen itr se 2 279 818 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ee entree nese nren terrens entend inrita 2 281 819 MC FILE CONT ROL 2 282 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID eee aaa ennemis 2 284 821 ASSIGN NETWORK iiiaae iiaea 2 285 822 VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE 2 286 823 ASSIGN NETWORK C OS eterno treten re terr he e either 2 288 824 NETWORK DIAL 2 290 825 ASSIGN NETWORKING 2 292 826 ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE sessi 2 294 829 LAN PRINTER innen teniente interiit se tenia 2 295 B30 ETHERNET PARAMETERS nter dest Lema d ebd e a dr e Ee rx seta 2 297 831 MGI PARAME TERS tes na Lia 2 300 832 VoIP ACCESS CODE cnet e irent 2 302 833 VOIP IP TABLE ttt ttr ett nbi hr neci ret dat iere reda 2 304 834 H 323 OP TIONS irte nene 2 305 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS 2 307 836 H 3
101. detect a C O provided meter pulse A Polarity Reversal trunk will de tect the line reversal signal which may be provided by the Trunk Line when the other party answers the outgoing call or the outside party clears the call Type Description PRS 1 When first PRS is detected call duration timer is started When second PRS is de tected call duration timer is stopped The call is not released PRS 2 When first PRS is detected call duration timer is started When second PRS is de tected call duration timer is stopped and the call is released PRS 3 The call duration timer starts based on the timer When first PRS is detected call dura tion timer is stopped and call is released MPD Metering Pulse Detection CONDITIONS e If the trunk is designated as PRS the call duration timer will be started and the results printed on the SMDR record PRS is also essential for dropping a trunk to trunk conversation which is unsupervised by an internal party DEFAULT DATA NONE NORMAL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 414 701 TRK PRS Display shows NONE 2 Dial desired trunk number e g 705 705 TRK PRS OR NONE Press Volume button to select trunk and use Right Soft button to move cursor Samsung Business Communications 2 113 CHAPTER 2 3 Dial for PRS 1 1 for PRS 2 2 for PRS 3 3 for 705 TRK PRS MPD or 4
102. e g 205 205 STN VOLUME RING VOLUME 4 3 Dial volume type e g 3 205 STN VOLUME OR SPEAKER VOL 13 Press Volume button to select volume type and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Press Volume button to select volume You will heara 205 STN VOLUME brief tone for the volume you select SPEAKER VOL 08 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE 2 28 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE Allows the system administrator to set a programmed message at any or all display phones There are 20 messages 01 20 available The last five message can be modified by each phone user CONDITIONS These messages are as set up in MMC 715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE DEFAULT DATA NO MESSAGES SELECTED ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 115 201 PGMMSG 00 Display shows CANCEL PGM MSG 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 PGMMSG 00 OR CANCEL PGM MSG Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL PGMMSG Select all stations 3 Dial message number e g 05 205 PGMMSG 05 OR PAGE Press Volume button to select message and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Dial 00 to cancel an existing m
103. enter 861 AUTO UPDATE TIME Display shows DISABLE 2 Enter the option number AUTO UPDATE TIME OR DISABLE Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor Samsung Business Communications 2 353 CHAPTER 2 3 Enter 1 or 0 to enable or disable AUTO UPDATE TIME OR ENABLE Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to store 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED DIAL BLOCK MMC 705 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING 2 354 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 863 NODE INFO This MMC allows 1000 systems to be connected by u spnet service No Option Description 1 ACCESS NUM Sets the system node ID 2 IPADDR Sets the system IP address 3 TELNUMBER Sets the system CO tel number 4 MAX COUNT Sets this value to support ENBLOCK DIAL MODE CONDITIONS NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 863 0001 ACCESS NUM Display shows 2 Select the entry number 0001 2000 0001 ACCESS NUM OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Select the option number
104. in house only by default DEFAULT DATA ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0 PROGRAM BUTTONS A Used to enter wild card X B Used to enter wild card Y C Used to enter wild card Z ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 702 Display shows 2 Dial index number e g 005 OR Press Volume button to select index and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter toll pattern via dial pad e g 202 OR Enter wild card e g 20X and press Right Soft but ton to move cursor to COS options Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY ALOW 001 BCDEFG 000000 ALOW 005 BCDEFG x 000000 005 BCDEFG 2020 000000 005 BCDEFG 20x 000000 2 197 CHAPTER 2 4 Press Volume button to move cursor along line 001 BCDEFG until under toll class mark e g 202 000100 Enter a 1 for Yes or for No Press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1 OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER 2 198 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER Provides flexibility to toll restriction call barring when a specific numbering plan is de sired There are only three entry tab
105. is 0 99900 ms 13 INVITE LING After the client sends ACK for the INVITE Final Response the 5000 ms TM client cannot confirm if the server received the ACK message The client waits for this length of time after sending ACK for the Final Response The range is 0 99900 ms Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued No Parameter Description Default 14 PROVISIONAL After receiving the Provision Response the User Agent 180000 m TIME waits for this length of time until Timeout ends The range 15 0 999900 ms 15 INV NO RESP Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request the User 5000 ms TIME Agent waits for this length of time The range is 0 99900 ms 16 GEN NO Before sending Cancel for General Request the User 5000 ms RESP TIME Agent waits for this length of time The range is 0 99900 ms 17 REQ RETRY After sending General Request the User Agent waits for 5000 ms TIME the Final Response for this length of time The range is 0 99900 ms 18 SIP SERVER Sets ENABLE or DISABLE to use an optional external DISABLE ENABLE industry standard SIP Server 20 SIPSERVER Sets SIP server IP address 0 0 0 0 IP 28 SIP SERVER Sets the port to use on the SIP Server 5060 PORT 29 SIGNAL PORT Indicates the port number for SIP signalling and sets a 10000 range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment The common and default IP path or port use
106. is set to YES the system will place calls on any free channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy If set to NO they will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free 1 BRI MODE BRI access mode select P P NOR Point to Point NORmal This operates like a standard telephone line with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406 P P DID Point to Point Direct Inward Dial This operates in a similar manner to an analogue DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel and translated within the system MMC7 14 to a single device P M NOR Point to Multi point NORmal This type of circuit operates in a similar manner to P P NORmal but allows multiple devices to be attached to the circuit Ringing is defined in MMC 406 P M MSN Point to Multi point MSN This setting is used when the line uses the MSN supplementary service Ringing is defined in MMC 421 2 DLSEND BRI dial sending mode select ENBLOCK Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a Cellphone OVERLAP Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user 3 TABLE Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network If NONE MMC405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER is sent to the network oth erwise the Calling Party Number entry in MMC 323 corresponding with the selected number is sent to the network 4 Used to select the type of the Cal
107. is used to detect the dial tone provided from Central Office or PBX system DEFAULT DATA unit milliseconds TONE ON OFF ON OFF BUSY TONE 500 500 500 500 CONFIRM BARGE IN 200 200 200 5000 DIAL TONE CONTINUOUS 2 154 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide unit milliseconds TONE ON OFF ON OFF DND NO MORE TONE 250 250 250 250 ERROR TONE 500 500 500 500 HOLD CAMP ON TONE 500 3500 500 3500 MESSAGE WAIT TONE 1000 250 1000 250 RING BACK TONE 400 200 400 2000 RING TONE 1000 3000 1000 3000 TRANSFER TONE 100 100 100 100 DID RINGBACK TONE 1000 3000 1000 3000 CO BUSY TONE 350 350 350 350 CO RINGBACK TONE 400 200 400 2000 CO DIAL TONE CONTINUOUS ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 506 BUSY TONE Display shows INTERRUPT TONE 2 Dial tone number from above list 00 13 e g 09 TRANSFER TONE OR INTERRUPT TONE Press Volume button to select tone press Left Soft button and advance to step 3 3 Dial tone option 0 for CONTINUOUS or 1 for IN TRANSFER TONE TERRUPT INTERRUPT TONE OR Press Volume button to select tone control and press Right Soft button to advance step 4 OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 4 Dial new value for interrupt times TRANSFER TONE 0100 must be four digits 9900 0100 9900 Press Right Soft button advances cursor and press Left Soft bu
108. mode to member 4 Press Right Soft button to move cursor to number 9 GROUP of member and enter valid member number MEMBER 05 NONE e g 05 via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Samsung Business Communications 2 173 CHAPTER 2 5 Enter valid trunk number e g 729 9 GROUP OR MEMBER 01 729 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 6 Repeat steps 1 5 to remove trunk from group 9 if necessary 7 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS LCR PROGRAMMING MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE VoIP PROGRAMMING MMC 832 VoIP ACCESS CODE MMC 833 VoIP IP TABLE 2 174 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE Allows the technician to assign a phone to any of the five internal paging zones Each page zone can have up to 32 members A phone may be assigned to more than one zone Page zone will page all external page zones as well as all phones that are members of page zone 0 DEFAULT DATA NO STATIONS ASSIGNED ACTION
109. move cursor 3 Dial 1 5 to select group OR Press Volume button to select group and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Dial 0 to select name or dial 1 4 to select member OR Press Volume button to select name or member and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 Samsung Business Communications 201 205 205 205 NONE DISPLAY GRP 1 NAME GRP 1 NAME GRP 1 NAME GRP 1 MBR1 2 33 CHAPTER 2 5 Enter conference member dial number 205 1 1 press Right Soft button to return to step 4 9 279421968 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE 2 34 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY Allows the technician to set the individual station display preference on a per station basis Caller ID or CLI can be selected to either show the name number first or no display de pending on the type of call Caller ID or CLI displays have the following options No Type Description 0 NO DISPLAY No Caller ID or CLIP data will be displayed 1 NUMBER FIRST The Caller ID or CLIP number received from the Central Office will be displayed first 2 NAME FIRST The Caller ID or CLIP name recei
110. pointed to a single channel and translated within the system MMC7 14 to a single device 2 DLSEND PRI dial sending mode select ENBLOCK Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a cellphone OVERLAP Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user 3 TABLE Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network If NONE MMC405 CO TRUNK NUMBER is sent to the network other wise the Calling Party Number entry in MMC 323 corresponding with the selected number is sent to the network 4 Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the net work UNKNOWN Unknown number INT NAT International number NATIONAL National number NETWORK Network specific number SUBSCRIB Subscriber number EXTEN Local number ABBREV Abbreviated number 5 NB PLAN Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the network UNKNOWN Unknown numbering plan ISDN ISDN numbering plan CCITT E 163 164 DATA Data numbering plan CCITT X 121 TELEX Telex numbering plan CCITT F 69 NATIONAL National standard numbering plan PRIVATE Private numbering plan EXTEN Local numbering plan 6 SAME CONNID When this option is set to OFF ISDN port is searched by CONN ID and 2 122 if set to ON searched by data channel id Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide CONDITIONS Before setting the PRI program the J2 jumper of th
111. press Right Soft button to move the cursor OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 4 Dial relay number via dial keypad e g 3751 EXT PAGE ZONE 6 and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 EMBER 3 3751 OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 above 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 176 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK Provides a means of adding or deleting speed dial blocks to the system or an individual phone With the ability to delete a block or blocks of speed dial it will not be necessary to waste these on such items as voice mail DPIMs or stations that do not require the ability to use speed dial The Free List will show how many bins are left to be assigned A library of up to 200 speed dial numbers may be allocated as needed The system list can have up to 50 numbers or 95 numbers if set in MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS and each station can have up to 5 numbers Speed dial numbers are assigned in blocks of 10 Each speed number may contain up to 24 digits DEFAULT DATA SYSTEM 200 ENTRIES STATIONS 1 BLOCK ASSIGNED ACTION 1 2 3 4 Press Transfer button and enter 606 Display shows Press Right Soft button to advance to next line OR You can view BUSY LIST using Volume button Make a
112. s with the CO ring cadence 3 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT s with the DOOR ring cadence 4 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT s with the ALARM ring cadence 5 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT s with the CALL BACK ring cadence 2 257 CHAPTER 2 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 759 CLI RINGING 001 Display shows CLI 2 Dial entry number e g 005 CLI RINGING 005 OR Press Volume button to make a selection press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter CID number and press Right Soft button CLI RINGING 005 to advance to next entry CLI 1234567 OR Enter CID number and press Left Soft button to return to step 2 4 Enter reject option via dial keypad CLI RINGING 005 1 for YES 0 for NO REJ NO PRI NO OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 5 Enter priority level via dial keypad 1 9 or NO CLI RINGING 005 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor REJ NO PRI NO 6 Enter station or group number for each Ring CLI RINGING 005 Plan destination via dial keypad e g 501 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 1 501 R2 NONE 7 Dial 1 8 or NO to select ring tone e g 2 CLI RINGING 00
113. selection of SYSTEM or EXT using Volume button and press Right Soft button to advance cursor Enter desired extension number via dial keypad e g 205 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY FREE SYSTEM 20 FREE SYSTEM 20 BUSY e SYSTEM 20 EXT2 Qual a d FREE EXT2 JE SHE S 20 20 180 20 20 2 177 CHAPTER 2 RELATED ITEMS MMC 105 MMC 106 MMC 705 MMC 706 2 178 5 Enter valid number for bins FREE LIST 20 e g 0 5 for EXT or 00 50 for SYSTEM EXE2Z0 5315 OR Press Volume button to make selection OR Press Hold button to delete bin s 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC STATION SPEED DIAL STATION SPEED DIAL NAME ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 607 UCD OPTIONS Sets up UCD options when an AA card has been installed MMC 601 must have already been used to define a UCD group with an overflow destination of an AA port or group A group is preferred over a port because a group allows multiple paths into the AA card and there
114. steady CONDITIONS Systems with MWSLI cards only DEFAULT DATA INTERRUPT LED 1000MS ON 1000MS OFF ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 511 MW LAMP CADENCE Display shows INTERRUPT LED 2 PressOor 1 to select CADENCE MW LAMP CADENCE OR INTERRUPT LED Press Volume button to make selection Press Right Soft button to advance step 3 3 Dial new values for interrupt times four digits MW LAMP CADENCE 2000 2000 Press Right Soft button to move cursor back If valid entry system returns to step 2 Press Left Soft button to move cursor back If valid entry system returns to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 161 CHAPTER 2 512 HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT This MMC defines up to 60 holiday dates throughout the year The system will override the normal ring plan for these days and remain in the ring plan associated with the holiday Dates are entered in a month day format for example July 4th would be 0704 One ring plan applies to all holidays DEFAULT DATA NO HOLIDAY ASSIGNED FOLLOWS RING PLAN 1 ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 512 Display shows the Ring Plan 2 Press Right Soft button advance cursor Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan OR Use
115. t egeat aad eu ada 2 129 426 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL 2 130 428 ASSIGN TRUNK TRUNK 2 131 432 SET A TRK 2 132 433 COS TH RATE ctn crim e 2 133 434 CONNECTION STATIJS 1 icc retenti 2 134 436 TRUNK TMC GAIN ette setius at ie ti Deka nva e naues 2 137 437 16TRK GAIN CONTRQL irren itcr tnnt b edad 2 138 500 SYSTEM WIDE nneren 2 139 501 SYSTEM TIMERS s ett eeepc enter eerte Ee pedestres oec tede a 2 141 502 STATION WIDE TIMERS 2n racio cete tet ert eene eek seta 2 147 503 TRUNK WIDE TIMERS tnr innen tetris antris 2 149 504 PULSE MAKE BREAK RATIO 2 152 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME 2 153 506 TONE GADENGE ttu ee eet a deas eret rt sre e es RE Eee ead 2 154 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN tenis 2 156 508 CALL COST deese i tier eee ec dete eene 2 158 510 SLI RING ttti tne saco te terre eerte eer eet diete eee redd nada 2 159 511 MSG WAITING LAMP
116. the CLIP number is sent to the network even if the CLIP restriction flag is set Enables use of overlap dialing DISABLE ENBLOC 2 305 CHAPTER 2 DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 834 GATEWAY CALL ID Display shows the first option 1234 2 Enter H 323 option number 00 20 via H 323 FAST SETUP dial keypad DISABLE OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter H 323 option data via dial keypad H 323 FAST SETUP OR ENABLE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 306 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS This MMC provides various MGI DSP options No Parameter Description Default 00 CODEC FRAME Selects which audio CODEC compression will be used and the transmission interval time of VoIP packets gen erated by the MGI card MGI3 card supports G 729A 8 G 729 8 G 711 64 and G 723 1 5 3 6 4K G 729A 20 Ms 01 ECHO CANCEL Enables or disables echo cancellation This function removes the echo that is generated by voice reflection and packet delay ENABLE 02 SILENCE SUP
117. the cursor right 3 Press Hold button to reset passcode 205 PASSCODE PASSCODE 1234 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 100 STATION LOCK 2 4 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 102 CALL FORWARD Allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for other station users This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the destination has been entered Allows several types of call forwarding FORWARD ALL FORWARD NO ANSWER FORWARD BUSY and FORWARD DND There is an additional option FORWARD BUSY NO ANSWER that allows both of these options to be activated at the same time provided that destinations have been entered for both No Type 0 FORWARD CANCEL 1 FORWARD ALL CALL 2 FORWARD BUSY 3 FORWARD NO ANSWER 4 FORWARD BUSY NO ANSWER 5 FORWARD DND CONDITIONS When FORWARD BUS Y NO ANSWER is selected calls are forwarded to stations set in FORWARD BUSY and FORWARD NO ANSWER Thus a destination number must be set for both FORWARD BUSY and FORWARD NO ANSWER before you can select the FORWARD BUSY NO ANSWER option e If forwarding is set to OFF in MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS call forwarding cannot be set but can be cancelled Default OFF Both FORWARD and EXT FWD must be set to ON
118. the dial keypad by pressing a number the required number of times to select the feature For example for OHVA the number 6 would be pressed three times Please remember that this program is system wide 07 SOSTN DIAL NO This is where directory numbers for BRI station ports are changed or assigned Default 8701 8708 09 NTWKLCRDIALNO This is where additional LCR access codes are entered if two or 2 230 more OfficeServ 7100 systems are networked together Default NONE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued No Type of Dial No Description 10 VIRT EXT DIAL NO This is where virtual station directory numbers are changed or assigned Default SLT 3501 3508 DGP 3401 3416 11 MGI DIAL NO This is where MGI port directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 3801 38xx 12 IP STN DIAL NO This is where IP based station directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 3201 3208 13 WLAN DIAL NO This is where IP based station directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 3301 3308 14 SPNET DIAL NO This is where Samsung proprietary switch to switch VoIP networking trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 8301 8308 15 H323 TRK DIAL NO This is where VoIP H 323 trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 8401 8408 16 SIP TRK DIAL NO This is where VoIP SIP trunk signalling port dir
119. the last active Ring Plan from the previous day until the end time which is 23 59 Monday starts Ring Plan 1 at 00 00 The system will stay in Ring Plan 1 until Ring Plan 2 starts 08 00 and will stay in Ring Plan 2 until Ring Plan 3 starts 10 00 and so on As each ring Plan start it will override the previous Ring Plan If a Ring Plan expires and there are no additional Ring Plans set the system will default to the Ring Plan with a time that extends past the expired Ring Plan time CONDITIONS 2 156 e When using a Samsung built in Voice Mail card that only has day night mode the day night must be set for each RING PLAN in MMC 758 VM DAY NIGHT Ring Plans must be programmed in sequence RP 1 2 3 4 etc A Ring Plan cannot be omitted i e you cannot program RP 1 2 5 etc Ahigher numbered Ring Plan cannot have a START time which begins before a lower numbered Ring Plan Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Ring Plan 1 KS Ring Plan 1 is the default Ring Plan for each day If no Ring Plan destination is NOTE entered the operator group is the default destination DEFAULT DATA START NONE END NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 507 RING PLAN SUN 1 Display shows STs END 2 Dial day number 0 6 e g 3 for Weds RING PLAN WED 1 OR Sie END Press Volume button to select day Press Right Soft button to advan
120. to step back 5 Press F button to access MMC 106 Station Speed Dial Name to enter a name for speed dial OR Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK 2 12 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each personal speed dial location This allows speed dial numbers to be selected by name when the directory dial feature is used ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 106 2 3 4 5 Display shows Dial station number e g 205 OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor If selected station has no speed dial bins the display will be as shown and a new station may be selected Dial speed dial location e g 01 OR Press Volume button to scroll through location num bers and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter the location name using the procedure described above and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK Sam
121. to move cursor 2 94 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 4 Dial call type 0 1 or 2 e g 1 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 102 CALL FORWARD Samsung Business Communications 205 PRESE 202 OR CHAPTER 2 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER Allows a number up to 16 digits to be entered and associated with a station or trunk num ber on a per PRI BRI basis When this station makes an outgoing call on this PRI the number entered here will be the Calling Party Number sent on the call There are four ta bles for the system If there are no entries in the tables the system uses the number for the trunk entered in MMC 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER for the Calling Party Number DEFAULT DATA EMPTY ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 323 201 SEND CLIP Display shows ig Dial extension or trunk number e g 230 230 SEND CLIP OR TS Press Volume button to select extension and press Right Soft button to move the cursor Dial table number 230 SEND CLIP OR PA Press Volume button to select table number and press Right Soft button to move the cu
122. which phone an add on module AOM is assigned There is no limit to the number of AOMs that can be assigned in the system A maximum of four AOMs can be as signed to a keyset CONDITIONS An AOM cannot be designated as Master If no AOM exists in the system the AOM NOT EXIST message is displayed DEFAULT DATA MASTER NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 209 301 AOM MASTER Display shows first AOM MASTER NONE 2 Dial AOM number 301 AOM MASTER OR MASTER NONE Use Volume button to scroll through AOM numbers and use Soft buttons to move cursor 3 Enter station number e g 301 301 AOM MASTER OR MASTER 201 Use Volume button for selection of stations and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 54 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 210 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TENANT Allows the system administrator to set system features on a per tenant basis Each system option has a corresponding dialling number as listed below All options toggle ON OFF No Option Default Description 00 DISA PSWD ON When ON caller must enter extension number and DISA password when they call a DISA trunk When OFF extension number and DISA password are not required and the caller has ful
123. 00 GK CONNECTION This enables the H 323 call to connect to a gate DISABLE keeper 01 GK ROUTING This enables routing of calls through a gatekeeper DISABLE 02 GK IP ADDRESS This is the gatekeeper s IP address 0 0 0 0 03 GK NAME This is the alphanumeric identifier of the gate Gatekeeper keeper Up to 16 characters 04 ALTER GK IP ADDR This provides an alternate gatekeeper address 0 0 0 0 05 H 323 GATEWAY ID This is the H 323 identifier used by the MGI when OfficeServ registering with the gatekeeper Up to 32 charac ters 06 E 164 GATEWAY This is the E 164 identifier used by the H 323 trunk 1234 NO when registering with the gatekeeper Up to 16 digits long 07 GK KEEP ALIVE This is the timer that the MGI uses to acknowledge 0 SEC the presence of the gatekeeper The range is 000 999 seconds 08 GK DOWN ROUTE This provides an alternate route if the primary gate PSTN keeper is down Selections are PSTN or ALTER GK 09 GK RAS TYPE Select if AUTO or MANUAL depending on your AUTO gatekeeper s capabilities 10 URQ REASON Select ON or OFF for use of Un register Request ON MODE RAS URQ messages 12 RRQ FAIL TIME Programs the time frame to re send Registration 30 seconds Request RAS RRQ messages to a gatekeeper The range is 1 99 2 310 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide N
124. 00 TAX RATE SETUP MMC 761 TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS MMC 856 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE MMC 703 TOLL DENY TABLE MMC 702 TOLL PASS CODE SPECIAL CODE TABLE MMC 709 TONE CADENCE MMC 506 TONE SOURCE MMC 514 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION MMC 217 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER MMC 405 TRUNK COS MMC 422 TRUNK DIAL TYPE MMC 402 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL MMC 426 TRUNK LINE PBX LINE MMC 401 TRUNK NAME MMC 404 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT MMC 406 TRUNK STATUS READ MMC 409 TRUNK TMC GAIN MMC 436 TRUNK TOLL CLASS MMC 403 TRUNK WIDE TIMERS MMC 503 TX LEVEL AND GAIN MMC 805 UCD AGENT ID MMC 717 UCD OPTIONS MMC 607 UK LCR OPTION MMC 716 VIEW MEMO NUMBER MMC 113 Samsung Business Communications 1 21 CHAPTER 1 Table 1 9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list continued MMC Name MMC No VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE MMC 822 VM ALARM MMC 755 VM CARD RESTART MMC 750 VM DAY NIGHT MMC 758 VM HALT MMC 754 VM IN OUT MMC 757 VoIP ACCESS CODE MMC 832 VoIP IP TABLE MMC 833 WAKE UP ANNOUNCEMENT MMC 224 WARNING DESTINATION MMC 753 WIP INFORMATION MMC 846 WLAN CONFIGURATION MMC 849 WLAN IP MAC LIST MMC 848 WLAN PARAMETERS MMC 845 16TRK GAIN MMC 437 1 22 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 1 6 Program List by Function This section describes MMC programs are classified by the function of the OfficeServ 7100
125. 05 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor to the next ring plan destination and repeat step 4 OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP 2 106 701 iLe SO 704 1500 A11 JL 8 50 0 704 1 500 704 1 205 704 1205 DISPLAY TRK RING 28500 RING 2 500 RING 2500 RING 2 8500 TRK RING 2500 RING 2 501 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 407 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE Provides a positive forced trunk release to a specific trunk or all trunks in the event of a trunk lock up DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 407 2 3 4 Display shows Dial in trunk number e g 704 OR Press Volume button selected trunk and press Right Soft button OR Select all trunks Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO Pressing 1 or will return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY MOL TRK LE AS HE 704 TRK RELS FP AS
126. 1 BCDEFG Display shows 000000 2 Dial index number e g 005 DENY 005 BCDEFG OR 000000 Press Volume button to select index and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter toll pattern via dial keypad e g 212 DENY 005 BCDEFG 21097 000000 OR Enter wild card e g 21X and press Right Soft but DENY 005 BCDEFG ton to move cursor to COS options 210 000000 4 Press Volume button to move cursor along line until DENY 001 BCDEFG under toll class mark e g E 212 000100 Enter a 1 for Yes or 0 for No Press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1 OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 2 196 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE Provides a way to make toll restriction very easy and flexible There are 500 allowable en tries in the allow table for an OfficeServ 7100 main system and each entry index can be as signed to a class of service Each index can have up to 12 digits With the use of wild cards MMC 704 Assign Wild Character more flexibility can be built into toll restriction Six toll levels B to G are programmable Toll level A is set as unrestricted by default and toll level is set as
127. 1 PHONG FUNCION CLE 1 23 16 2 Networking FU nctlOn cec eor Eoo en Rei coe 1 24 TOS VOR FUNCION PI 1 24 6 4 WLAN FUNGON 1 25 16 5 ECR FUNCOM 1 25 1 6 6 Auto Attendant Voice Mail Function een 1 26 Samsung Business Communications Vil 1 6 7 Diagnosis Function itinere eee 1 27 168 Hotel FUNCUHON seines c e ED RE 1 27 CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming 2 1 Overview of Programming 2 1 2 2 Programming Procedure eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee eene naagin anaran nnns ssi n nnt paana niana ninin 2 2 STATION LOCK DP EE 2 2 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE nnne trennen nn 2 4 102 CALL FORWARD eid ee Hec ede Re HE pede TE eee Hee Eger pedes 2 5 103 SET ANSWER MODE sninen e t tn iE o tc italian 2 7 1 04 STATION NAME Mee tetas 2 9 105 STATION SPEED DIAL eter er UR 2 11 106 STATION SPEED DIAL nennen trennen nnne 2 13 107 KEY EXTENDER tna t Tete it iaces etat iins i gea 2 14 108 STATION STATUS ue ce ce Ra e a eee 2 16 109 DATE DISPLAY 0c iie ee ide ended nre Ie dede le d
128. 1 505 STN GROUP OR RING DISTRIBUTE Press Volume button to scroll options and press Right Soft button to move cursor 6 Dial ring option 0 2 e g 0 505 STN GROUP OR RING SEQUENTIAL Press Volume button to make selection Press Left Soft button to move cursor back to RING or press Right Soft button to return to step 2 2 170 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 7 Dial next feature option and continue 505 STN GROUP OR RING SEQUENTIAL Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 8 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE MMC 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL Samsung Business Communications 2 171 CHAPTER 2 602 STATION GROUP Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a name up to 11 characters to iden tify an individual station group ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 602 500 SGR NAME Display shows 2 Dial group number e g 505 505 SGR NAME OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Left or Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter name 505 SGR NAME
129. 10 LCR CLASS MMC 711 LCR TIME MMC 712 LCR ROUTE MMC 713 LCR DGT 724 NUMBER PLAN Samsung Business Communications 001 OUT DIGIT 7500 001 USE LCR NUM 001 USE LCR NUM 001 NEXT ROUTE 001 NEXT ROUTE LCR 2 265 CHAPTER 2 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM Used to open and close technician level programming If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC an error message will be displayed CONDITIONS A 4 digit passcode is required to access this MMC Each character can be digits 0 9 When opened this MMC enables access to all MMCs DEFAULT DATA DISABLE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 800 ENABLE TECH PROG Display shows PASSCODE 2 Enter passcode ENABLE TECH PROG PASSCODE Correct code shows ENABLE TECH PROG DISABLE TENANT 1 Incorrect code shows ENABLE TECH PROG PASSCODE ERROR 3 Enter 1 to enable or 0 to disable ENABLE TECH PROG OR ENABLE TENANT 1 Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move tenant number and enter tenant number 1 2 4 Press Speaker button to advance to MMC entry level 801 TEC PASSCODE SHEE Cl PROG ID 5 Enter the MMC required to begin programming 6 To log out and return to MMC 800 press Volume
130. 11 22 11827 2 Enter number 1 8 for required access display 3 11 22 12 307 e g 3 3203 811 22 193330 OR Press Volume button to scroll 3 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 800 2 348 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 857 VIRTUAL CABINET SET This MMC is the program that specifies the type of virtual cabinet card The type of virtual cabinet card is as follows SLT C2S01 C2S03 BRI STN 4502 C5S01 DGP 2501 C2S03 4502 C5S01 STN WIRED C3S01 C4S01 SPNET TRK C3S02 C5S03 WLAN C3S01 C4S01 SIP TRK 5501 C5S03 SIP STN C3S01 C4S01 H323 TRK 5501 C5S03 UMS DEFAULT DATA 2 1 SLI 3 1 WIRED ITP 2 DLI 2 WIRED ITP 3 DLI 3 WIRED ITP 4 1 WLAN ITP 5 1 SPNET TRK 2 BRI STN 2 SIP TRK 3 GCONF STN Is H323 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 857 4 501 51 Display shows SLT 2 Enter number 1 3 for cabinet number and enter num C4 501 5LT ber 1 12 for slot number SLT OR Press Volume button to scroll Samsung Business Communications 2 349 CHAPTER 2 3 Press Volume to scroll card type and Select 4 501 51 card type by pressing Right soft botton
131. 2 3 Trunk Related MMC The MMC programs related to the function of the trunk are as follows Table 1 4 Trunk Related MMC list MMC No MMC Name MMC 400 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TRUNK MMC 401 TRUNK LINE PBX LINE MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE MMC 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS MMC 404 TRUNK NAME MMC 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER MMC 406 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT MMC 407 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE MMC 409 TRUNK STATUS READ MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK MMC 412 ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL MMC 414 MPD PRS SIGNAL MMC 415 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA MMC 417 E1 PRI CRC4 MMC 418 BRI amp PRI CARD RESTART MMC 419 BRI OPTIONS MMC 420 PRI OPTIONS MMC 421 MSN DIGIT MMC 422 TRUNK COS MMC 423 S T MODE MMC 424 BRI SO MAPPING MMC 425 CID TRUNKS MMC 426 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL MMC 428 ASSIGN TRUNK TRUNK USE MMC 432 SET H TRK MMC 433 COST RATE MMC 434 CONNECTION STATUS MMC 436 TRUNK TMC GAIN MMCL 437 16TRK GAIN 1 10 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 1 4 2 4 Timer and Tone Related MMC The MMC programs related to the function of the timer and tone are as follows Table 1 5 Timer and Tone Related MMC list MMC No MMC Name MMC 500 SYSTEM WIDE COUNTERS MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS MMC 502 STATION WIDE TIMERS MMC 503 TRUNK WIDE TIMERS MMC 504 PULS
132. 23 GICOPT IONS 2 310 837 SIP OPTIONS terere i tte tine crt re e ce Eb Ei nee eti deeds 2 312 839 USER C 2 316 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES cerit arte tte taret rana 2 317 840 IP PHONE 1 11 nrnnnenrenrree terret nr enters 2 318 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS 2 eee i tree tne eda teer etos 2 321 845 WLAN PARAMETERS ctt scott een dettes die abd re re RR 2 325 846 WIP INFORMATION 000 o oo eee eee etna enne 2 330 848 WLAN IP MAG LIST eee eee tee bre d d te tes 2 332 849 WLAN 2 333 850 SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY 2 335 851 ALARM EE a Taa aA Sedra NE 2 336 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS 2 338 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY a aieeaa 2 345 854 DIAGNOSTIG TIME a etti tet 2 347 856 TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS innen terre nr se tneis 2 348 857 VIRTUAL CABINET SET riua aaa A a En A A a a nai rE 2 349 859 HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY
133. 3 TRUNK TOLL CLASS Assigns to class level assignments on a per trunk or all trunk basis in a day or night con dition The options for toll level will follow either the station class or the class of service defined in MMCs 702 Toll Deny Table and 703 Toll Allowance Table The toll classes available are listed below with their entry numbers No Class Description 0 F STN Follow station toll restriction 1 CLS A Follow toll class A Unrestricted 2 CLS B Follow toll class B 3 CLS C Follow toll class C 4 CLS D Follow toll class D 5 CLS E Follow toll class E 6 CLS F Follow toll class F 7 CLS G Follow toll class G 8 CLS H Follow toll class H All restricted DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS F STN ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 403 701 TOLL CLASS Display shows 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 OR 2910 91 CAS dLgi Sum gig SN Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor OR Select all 3 Dial ring plan number 1 6 OR ALL TOLL CLASS 1 F STN 2 F_STN 704 TOLL CLASS 1 F SIN 2 E STN Use Volume button to scroll through ring plan numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 2 102 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 4 Enter day toll class e g 2 for CLS B 704 TOLM CLASS OR 1 CLS B 2 F STN Press Volume b
134. 5 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor TONE 2 CAD NO 8 Dial 1 5 or NO to select ring cadence CLI RINGING 005 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor TONE 2 CAD NO 9 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID 2 258 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 760 ITEM COST TABLE This MMC provides a means to assign a code to a billable item along with a 10 character name for the item There are a maximum of 100 entries 00 to 99 in the table with item 00 reserved as the code for room deposits 01 reserved as the code for phone deposits and items 89 to 99 reserved for other PMS stream items These item codes with the exception of codes 93 to 99 will appear on the guests bills at checkout and will serve to identify what each charge on the bill is for The room bill when printed will also show telephone calls with an item designation of TEL and the name field will show the number dialled In addition to the name up to eight of the tax codes or rates defined in MMC 761 can be applied to each item PRE DEFINED CODES No Code Description 00 Room Deposit This is the code used for pre pay room deposits 01 Phone Deposit This is the code used
135. 701 TRUNK GAIN Display shows 0 0 TX 10 0 2 Enter desired trunk number e g 705 705 TRUNK GAIN via the dial keypad WretO OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL TRUNK GAIN Select all RX 0 0 TX 0 0 3 Press Volume button to make selection and 705 TRUNK GAIN press Right Soft button to move cursor 0 0 TX 0 0 4 Press Volume button to make selection and 701 TRUNK GAIN press Right Soft button to move cursor and RX 0 0 TX 2 5 return to step 1 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 130 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 428 ASSIGN TRUNK TRUNK USE This MMC is used to allow or restrict trunks from making outgoing calls to other trunks within the same system By default DIAL YES all trunks can use other trunks To prevent use select NO DEFAULT DATA DIAL YES ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 Press Transfer button and enter 428 Display shows Dial the trunk use group number e g 305 OR Press Volume button to selection and press Right Soft button OR Select all trunk use groups Dial the trunk use group number e g 304 OR Press Volume button to selection and press Right Soft button Dial for YES or 0 for NO OR Press Volume button to select YES NO and press Right Soft button
136. 800 MSEC MFR TIME 00 SEC DISA ANSWR 01 SEC CONN DELAY 0000 MSEC ACTION 2 150 1 2 3 4 Press Transfer button and enter 503 Display shows Dial trunk number e g 704 OR Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR Select all trunks Dial timer number from the list OR Press Volume button to select timer and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter new timer value must be four digits e g 0200 System returns to step 2 DISPLAY 701 ANS BAK TM 0600 MS gt 704 ANS BAK 0600 MS gt ALL ANS BAK TM 0600 MS gt _ 704 DTMF DUR 0100 MS gt _ 704 DTMF DUR 0100 MS gt 0200 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 151 CHAPTER 2 504 PULSE MAKE BREAK RATIO Allows the ability to change the value of pulses per second and the duration of the make break time This will only affect rotary dial trunks No Item Description 0 MAKE BREAK RATIO Make Break ratio of dial pulse 01 99 1 PULSE PER SECOND Number of dial pulses per second 10 or 20 DEFAULT DATA MAKE BREAK 33 MAKE PULSES PER SECOND 10 PPS ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Tr
137. ALL COST AUTO CAMPON OFF OFF When ON the cost of the call in progress will show in the upper right corner of the phone display instead of dura tion of the call When ON phone users can allow intercom calls to camp on to other phones without having to press a CAMP ON key 09 AME BGM OFF This feature selects whether a station using Answer Ma chine Emulation will hear their personal greeting or BGM while callers are listening to the personal greeting ABGM source must be selected for this to work 10 AME PASSCODE OFF When ON station users who have AME set must enter their station password to listen to messages being left 11 DISP SPDNAME OFF When ON the speed dial name associated with a speed dial number is displayed on a phone equipped a LCD display when using speed dial 12 13 CID REVW ALL SECURE OHVA ON ON When ON saves information on all calls that ring at an extension When OFF saves information only on calls that were not answered at the extension or were an swered by voice mail When ON OHVA announcements will be heard on the handset When OFF OHVA announcements will be heard over the phone speaker Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued No Feature Default Description 14 NOT CONT CID ON When OFF the Caller ID will be displayed for the dura tion of the call When
138. AMMING MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications 2 229 CHAPTER 2 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN This MMC allows the technician to change directory numbers for stations trunks station groups trunk groups and feature access codes The system can be pre programmed with default 3 or 4 digit numbering for stations station groups and trunk numbers depending on the position of the DIP switches on the MCP card There is an error message provided to prevent the accidental duplication of a directory number or feature access code No Type of Dial No Description 00 STN DIAL NO This is where station directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 201 2xx 3xx last 319 or 2001 2xxx 01 TRK DIAL NO This is where trunk directory numbers are changed or assigned Default 701 7xx or 7001 7xxx 02 AA VD DIAL NO Not used 03 MISC DIAL NO This is where directory numbers for relays MOH ports and the alarm sensor are changed or assigned Default MISCO1 371 MISCO2 361 MISCO03 362 MISC04 3999 04 STNG DIAL This is where station group numbers are changed or assigned NUMBER Default 500 5xx or 5001 5xxx 05 TRKG DIAL This is where trunk group numbers are changed or assigned NUMBER Default The first is 9 or 0 800 809 06 FEAT DIAL NUMBER This is where feature access codes are changed or assigned Dial ling codes are entered via
139. APTER 2 4 Press Volume button to select YES NO option 005 USE 101 OR DIAL NO ANS YES Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor to ANS option Press Volume button to select YES NO Option 005 USE 101 OR DIAL NO ANS YES Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 316 COPY STATION USABLE MMC 614 STATION TRUNK USE GROUP 2 78 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE This MMC allows one of the four options to be selected the assignment of account codes with verification account codes without verification and authorization codes or none of these on a per station basis or on an all station basis The system supports 500 authoriza tion codes and 999 account codes which may or may not require verification No Type Description 0 NONE No Account or Authorization code required strictly voluntary AUTHORIZE CODE Forces user to enter a valid Authorization code of four or more digits listed in the AUTHORIZATION CODE Table MMC 707 ACCT VERIFIED Forces user to enter a valid Account code listed in the AC COUNT CODE Table MMC 708 ACCT NO VERIFIED DEFAULT DATA Forces user to ent
140. Attribute Registration Protocol Gatekeeper GARP VLAN Registration Protocol High level Data Link Control Home Location Register Hypertext Markup Language Hypertext Transfer Protocol Identification Intrusion Detection System Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Messaging Access Protocol Intelligent Network Service Control Point Input Output Module Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide IPC IPDC IPM IP SCP ISDN ISUP ITM ITP KDB LAN LCD LCP LED LIM MCP MDF MEGACO MFM MG MGC MGI MGCP MISC MMC MWSLI NAT NMS Samsung Business Communications Internet Protocol Inter Processor Communication Internet Protocol Device Control Inter Processor Communications and Memory Module Internet Protocol Service Control Point Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN User Part IP Telephony Module IP Telephone Keyset Daughterboard Local Area Network Liquid Crystal Display Local Control Processor Light Emitting Diode LAN Interface Module Main Control Processor Main Distribution Frame Media Gateway Control Multi Frequency Module Media Gateway Media Gateway Controller Media Gateway Interface Media Gateway Control Protocol Miscellaneous Function Module Man Machine Communication Message Waiting Single Line Interface Network Address Translation Network Management System O OPX PAT
141. B PORT Public Port 6 VERSION No entry required Used to indicate revision of MGI3 S W 8 CARD RESET Reboots MGI card 9 IP VERSION Specidies MGI IP version is IPv4 IPv6 When changing any IP address value three digits must be entered for each octet field For example 192 168 1 10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010 MGI PARAMETERS IPADDRESS GATEWAY and SUB MASK any changes to these parameters will not be applied until the card is reset 2 300 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide CONDITIONS This MMC cannot be accessed unless there is an MGI card installed in the system DEFAULT DATA IP ADDRESS 1 1 1 1 GATEWAY 1 1 1 1 SUB MASK 255 255 255 0 IP TYPE PRIVATE IP ONLY PUBLIC IP 1 1 1 1 PUB PORT 00000 VERSION V4 CARD RESET NO IP VERSION IPv4 ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 831 3801 IP ADDRESS Display shows the first MGI card 168 219 Enter MGI number 3801 IP ADDRESS OR 168 219 76 101 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter MGI parameter number 3801 IP ADDRESS OR 168 219 76 101 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter MGI parameter 3801 IP ADDRESS OR 155 10 1 100 Press Right Soft button to move cursor Press Transfer button to save and exit OR
142. C 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS DISPLAY 3201 USER ID 3201 3210 USER ID 3210 LSZAL G 729A S19 IONS NAP Gio WALA Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS This MMC provides various proprietary Samsung VoIP and IP integration options The options set in this MMC apply system wide No Option Description Default 00 PHONE VERSION Sets running IP based phone and new phone soft 0000 ware version with the system 0 LARGE DGP Large LCD phone 1 LARGE ITP Large LCD IP based phone 2 2LINE ITP2 2 line LCD IP based phone 3 WIPM APPL Wireless IP based mobile phone software 4 SOFT PC IP phone emulation on PC Soft Phone application 5 SOFT PDA IP phone emulation on PDA Soft Phone application 8 WIPM BOOT Wireless IP based mobile phone boot program 9 SOFT MENU Soft menu version 01 PHONE TFTP IP Sets phone software upgrade TFTP server IP ad 0 0 0 0 dress 02 REGISTRATION Defines the method that IP based phones use to register with the system 0 TYPE SYS PSWD a SYS PSWD System will authenticate the IP based phones with the value in ITP REGISTRATION PSWD parameter see 1 below B PHONE PSWD System will authenticate the IP based phones according to entries made in MMC 840 c DISABLE System will not authenticate IP based phones 1 PSWD This
143. D ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 335 CHAPTER 2 851 ALARM REPORTING This MMC is used to view store print or clear system alarms Two levels of faults are dis played via an alarm code major alarms and minor alarms Major alarms codes are usually service affecting and require a certified technician to determine the fault A minor alarm in dicates a fault that may or may not be service affecting and usually does not seriously de grade the system s operating capabilities The alarm buffer holds up to 100 alarms on a First In First Out FIFO basis Alarms pro vide a date and time stamp based on the system time If applicable the hardware cabinet port and or slot will be displayed If an ALARM SIO port is programmed MMC 804 alarm information can be printed on demand and as it is provided ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS Select one of the options No Option Description 0 VIEW ALARMS View alarm buffer 1 OVERFLOW Determines buffer control when buffer is full CONTROL OVERWRITTEN When buffer is full the oldest entry in buffer is overwritten Default 1 STOP RECORDING When buffer is full stop recording alarms 2 CLEAR ALARM BUF Clears alarm buffer 3 PRINT ALARM BUF Prints contents of alarm buffer to the assigned alarm IO port ALARM CODE DEFINITION See Alarm Code Definitions in MMC 852 DEFAULT DATA NONE 2 336 Samsung Busin
144. DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 315 SET RELOCATION Display shows aT 2 Enter number of original station e g 202 SET RELOCATION Press Right Soft button to move cursor EXT202 EXT 3 Enter second station number e g 210 SET RELOCATE Press Right Soft button to enter data EXT202 EXT210 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit SET RELOCATION OR EX EXT Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 86 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide EURO 6B NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO EURO 12B NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO EURO 24B NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO 48B AOM NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO 64B AOM NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO iDCS 28D NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES iDCS 18D NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES iDCS 8D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DS 5012L NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DS 5014D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DS 5021D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DS 5007S NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DS 5014S NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DS 5038S NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO IP Phone NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Samsung Business Communications 2 87 CHAPTER 2 EURO 6B NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO EURO 12B NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
145. DEFAULT DATA RESTORE ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 721 Display shows 2 Enter desired station number e g 205 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Press Volume button to make function selection and press Right Soft button to enter and return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC 722 MMC 723 Samsung Business Communications STATION KEY PROGRAMMING SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING DISPLAY 201 SAVE KEY RESTORE 205 SAVE KEY RESTORE 205 SAVE KEY SAVE 2 223 CHAPTER 2 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING Allows the customizing of programmable buttons on specific phones and add on modules 5 For phones buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default For AOMs all buttons are set as DS keys by default Features are selected by pressing the dial keypad but tons the required number of times For example for OHVA the number 6 is pressed three times If the BOSS key is required 2 is pressed for the first letter B and then the Volume button used to change the selection from BARGE to BOSS DIAL KEYPAD COUNT 1 2 3 4 DIAL 2 AB BARGE CAD DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO DIAL 4 GPIK HDSET ICONF D
146. DGP 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 724 NUMBER PLAB 822 VIR EXT TYPE 2 350 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 859 HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY This MMC is used for system hardware EPLD PCB version display This is a READ ONLY MMC No Option Description 1 MP CARD Shows the EPLD PCB version of MCP 2 151 Shows the EPLD PCB version of card in cabinet1 slot1 3 152 Shows the EPLD PCB version of cabinet1 slot2 DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 859 EPLD PCB VERSION Display shows P CARD V30 2 Enter the option number EPLD PCB VERSION OR CIGI s UE 850 Press Volume button to scroll 3 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 351 CHAPTER 2 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS Sets a number of system options DEFAULT DATA AUTO UPDATE TIME DISABLE SYSTEM SPEED BIN MAX 500 IDLE WHEN ENBLOC DISABLE 2 LINE ENBLOCK DISABLE 2 ZONE EXT PAGE DISABLE 2 352 USE LB FOR PAGE NONE LP TRK TONE DISC DISABLE ISDN SS FEATURE DISABLE SPNET OVERLAP DISABLE SPNET CLI TABLE NONE E LCR CLI TABLE NONE EXTERNAL INT CHIME
147. DITIONS This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION DEFAULT DATA ALL RATES ARE 100 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 762 RM COST RAT SUN Display shows 100 2 Dial day number 0 6 e g 2 RM COST RAT TUE OR 100 Press Volume button to select day and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter room cost rate 001 999 e g 090 RM COST RAT TUE 100 090 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE Samsung Business Communications 2 263 CHAPTER 2 763 SECOND LCR This MMC allows the technician to input the Extended LCR information table Max table index is 200 This table have translation and route information for input digits The last table index 200 has only NEXT ROUTE option This is used for the case there are no matching table for user input digits NEXT ROUTE option can be set by LCR or trunk group as follows Option Description Default IN DIGIT Define user input digits after E LCR code Max 16 digits OUT DIGIT Outgoing digits these digits will be sent instead of input digits Max 16 digits USE LCR NUM Select which E LCR code E LCR1 E LCR2 E LCR3 E LCR4 ALL used for this table index NEXT ROUTE Select LCR or trunk group to sei
148. E MAKE BREAK RATIO MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME MMC 506 TONE CADENCE MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME MMC 508 CALL COST MMC 510 SLI RING CADENCE MMC 511 MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE MMC 512 HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT MMC 513 HOTEL TIMER MMC 514 TONE SOURCE MMC 515 DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT 1 4 2 5 Group Related MMC The MMC programs related to the function of a group are as follows Table 1 6 Group Related MMC list MMC No MMC Name MMC 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP MMC 602 STATION GROUP NAME MMC 603 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP MMC 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE MMC 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS MMC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK MMC 609 CALL LOG BLOCK MMC 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING MMC 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE Samsung Business Communications 1 Table 1 6 Group Related MMC list continued MMC No MMC Name MMC 614 STATION TRUNK USE GROUP MMC 615 MGI GROUP MMC 616 MGI USER 1 4 2 6 Tables Codes AA DECT and VM MMC The MMC programs related to the function of the tables codes AA DECT and VM are as follows Table 1 7 Tables Codes AA DECT and VM list MMC No MMC Name MMC 700 COPY COS CONTENTS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE MMC
149. E MGI the MGI can be allocated between remote IPs in the same private zone This option can change UDP TCP signal type for IPs ITP V3 xx only supports the TCP signal type If TCP is set and ITP V2 xx attempts to connect the TCP signal type will change from TCP to UDP automatically NOT USE MGI UDP 18 PRIVATE IP Displays private IP address of remote IP phone allo cated by phone s router 19 VIDEO DSP This option is codec value o f Video IP phone 0 MPEG4 1 H 263 H 263 20 VIDEO SIZE DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION Samsung Business Communications This option is for video size 0 CIF 2 QCIF CIF 2 319 CHAPTER 2 1 2 3 4 5 Press Transfer button and enter 840 Display shows Enter IP phone number via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter IP phone option number via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter option data via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS 2 320 MMC 615 MGI GROUP MMC 616 MGI USER MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS MM
150. GN FORCED CODE eene 2 79 306 HOT LINE OFF HOOK 2 80 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE sse 2 81 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE 1 nennen nnne nnne nnne entren 2 82 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE 2 83 312 ALLOW CALLER ID inire i eto c cote tpe A ea Ea iat 2 84 314 CONFIRM OUTGOING eee nennt entretien nnne 2 85 315 CUSTOMER SET 2 86 316 COPY STATION USABLE teneis 2 89 317 ASSIGN STATION STATION USE sessi nr nn nnne reset en 2 90 318 DISTINCTIVE RINGING nennen etna sn tenete sa aa 2 91 319 BRANCH GROUD cette tete d reete Te erede e enne n t Head eet ee Eee eI da eee rede Eee oes 2 93 320 PRESET FORWARD NO entren nnne tnnt 2 94 323 CALLING PARTY 1 nnsn i trente sete in 2 96 326 RINGBACK TONE 1 nennen trennen nnne 2 97 401 TRUNK EINE PBX EINE eric eire rte rtt eret net bets 2 100 402 TRUNK DIAL 2 t trece hnc da nde e rata 2 101 403 TRUNK OAS S x iter tete utere theme rtt
151. Guide 5 Enter destinations for the six ring plans via the dial 704 MSN DGT 4 keypad e g 204 for ring plan 1 1 82194 2 NONE OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 6 Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO 704 MSN DGT 4 OR CW NO OPT ACEPT Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 7 Enter 1 for ACCEPT or 0 for REJECT 704 MSN DGT 4 OR CW NO OPT ACEPT Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 8 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 423 S T MODE 422 TRUNK COS Used to assign a class of service to each trunk for each of the six ring plans available There are 30 different classes of service that are defined in MMC 701 Assign COS Con tents Classes of service are numbered 01 30 Trunk COS applies on Tandem connections DEFAULT DATA ALL RING PLANS COS 01 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 422 701 TRK COS Display shows first trunk isQu 2901 9201 Samsung Business Communications 2 125 CHAPTER 2 2 3 4 5 Dial trunk number e g 705 705 COS OR 1801 2501 9801 Use Volume button to scroll through trunks Press Right Soft button to advance to step 3 OR Use Volume button to scroll through trunks and press Left Soft button to advance to step 4 OR ALL
152. IAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SETDND DIAL 8 TG UA VG DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP Programmable Button Assignments Feature Description Feature Description AB ABSENCE MMPG MEET ME PAGE ABAND ABANDONED CALL MS MANUAL SIGNALLING ABW AGENT BUSY WRAP UP MSG MESSAGE ACC ACCOUNT MUTE MUTE MW MESSAGE WAIT AN RLS ANSWER RELEASE NEW NEW CALL BARGE BARGE IN NND NAME NUMBER DATE BILL BILL Hotel Feature NOCLIP NO CID SEND BLOCK OHVA BLOCK NPG NETWORK PAGE BOOTH BOOTH Hotel Feature NS NETWORK STATION BOSS BOSS SECRETARY NXT CID NEXT 2 224 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued Feature Description Feature Description CAD CALL ACTIVITY DISPLAY OHVA OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE CALL CALL BUTTON OPER OPERATOR CAMP STATION CAMP ON PAGE PAGE CANMG MESSAGE CANCEL PAGPK PICKUP PAGE HOLD CBK CALLBACK PARK CALL PARK ORBIT cc CALL COVERAGE PAUSE PAUSE CCBS ISDN CALL BACK CHIN CHECK IN Hotel Feature PMSG PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE CHOUT CHECK OUT Hotel Feature PRB PRIVACY RELEASE AND BRIDGE CHOICE CHOICE PROG SET PROGRAM Related to News Server CLIP CALLER ID PTHR PATH REPLACEMENT CONF CONFERENCE RB ROOM BILL Hotel Feature CONP CONNECTED NAME REJECT OHVA REJECT DISPLAY CR CALL RECORD RETRY AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY Requires SVMi card CREDIT CREDIT Hotel Feature REVW REVIE
153. IPNW REAL RB OFF When ON the system will connect the real path of the outgo ing trunk to the VoIP networking trunk user instead of provid ing virtual ringback tone 66 TRK AUTO OFF When ON an incoming trunk call is connected to MOH MOH automatically after the DISA ANSWR timer MMC 503 ex pires and the caller hears MOH If the TRK AUTOMOH DISC timer in MMC501 expires before the call is answered it is disconnected To use this feature MMC 400 AUTO AN SWER option must set to ON 67 TRSF VT KEY ON When ON works like the VT key when the user transfers the call to Voice Mail using the TRSF key 68 PAIR NORING OFF When ON if a paired phone is busy the call camps on and a message waiting indication is set at the busy phone and does not ring the free paired extension 69 DISANO ACT OFF When ON a DISA call will go to the station assigned in MMC 406 after the DISA NO ACT timer expires 70 ICM AUTO OFF When ON will allow internal calls to be put on hold auto HOLD matically when another call is taken 71 DTMF TO 0 OFF When ON DTMF can be sent to SO station 72 STNHOLD OFF The holded call can be picked up by other station PICK 73 AREADELETE OFF When ON if call is created by phonebook area code can be deleted 74 ELCR DIALTON OFF In case of second Icr dial tone can be different 75 NET DTMF OFF When spnet and station is seizing trk port and listening dial FWD tone it can be forward to external 2 58
154. IT 005 Soft button to return to Step 1 NAME 11 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS Samsung Business Communications 2 215 CHAPTER 2 715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE Allows custom messages to be programmed or default messages to be changed ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME There are 15 messages in the system MESSAGES 01 10 are 16 character pre programmed default messages Any of them can be changed MESSAGES 11 15 are 16 character blank messages that can be created DEFAULT DATA TEN PROGRAMMED MESSAGES 01 02 03 04 05 1 2 3 4 IN A MEETING 06 OUT CALL 07 OUT TO LUNCH 08 LEAVE A MESSAGE 09 PAGE ME 10 Press Transfer button and enter 715 Display shows Enter message number e g 11 OR OUT OF TOWN IN TOMORROW RETURN AFTERNOON ON VACATION GONE HOME DISPLAY PGM MESSAGE 01 IN A MEETING PGM MESSAGE 11 Blank Message Press Volume button arrow to make selection Press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter message via dial keypad maximum 16 PGM MESSAGE 11 characters IN MEETING ROOM Use A button to toggle upper case lower case Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and e
155. LE MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE Samsung Business Communications 2 83 CHAPTER 2 312 ALLOW CALLER ID Allows the system administrator or technician to allow or deny CID data to be sent from or displayed at LCD phones Option Description RCV Set whether to display CID SND Set whether to send CID for ISDN calls DEFAULT DATA RCV YES SND YES ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 312 201 CID ANI Display shows RCV YES SND YES 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 CID ANI OR RCV YES SND YES Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL CID ANI Select all stations RCV YES SND YES 3 Dial 0 or 1 to select Receive option 05 ANT RCV YES SND YES Press Volume button to select receive option and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Dial 0 or 1 to select Send option 205 CID ANI OR RCV YES SND YES Press Volume button to select send option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY 2 84 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 314 CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL Allows outgoing call restriction by call duration time ca
156. LL CONTROL Determines whether the common bell relay contacts have an interrupted or continuous clo sure when activated If interrupted is chosen the relay follows an internal Trunk Line ring pattern of one second closed followed by three seconds open CONDITIONS When the common bell is not used for night time ring the common bell must be set to a station group so that all stations in the group ring DEFAULT DATA CONTINUOUS ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 204 3801 COM BELL Display shows current setting CONTINUOUS 2 Dial common bell number 3801 COM BELL OR CONTINUOUS Press Volume button to make selection of common bell numbers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Dial 0 for continuous or 1 for interrupted operation 3802 COM BELL OR INTERRUPTED Use Volume button to scroll through options and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP Samsung Business Communications 2 49 CHAPTER 2 205 ASSIGN LOUD BELL Designates the station that controls the loud bell ring output of a MIS card Each MIS card provides one loud bell port The loud bell will follow the ring cadence of the designated station CONDITIONS Only a station can be ass
157. LL CONTROL MMC 205 ASSIGN LOUD BELL MMC 206 BARGE IN TYPE MMC 207 ASSIGN VM AA PORT MMC 208 ASSIGN RING TYPE MMC 209 ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE MMC 210 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TENANT MMC 211 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT MMC 214 DISA ALARM RINGING STATION MMC 217 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION MMC 219 RELAY TYPE MMC 220 ISDN SERVICE TYPE MMC 221 EXTENSION TYPE MMC 222 FAX PAIR MMC 224 WAKE UP ANNOUNCEMENT 1 8 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 1 4 2 2 Station Related MMC The MMC programs related to the function of the station are as follows Table 1 3 Station Related MMC list MMC No MMC Name MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER STATION MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC 302 PICKUP GROUPS MMC 303 ASSIGN BOSS SECRETARY MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION TRUNK USE MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE MMC 306 HOT LINE OFF HOOK SELECTION MMC 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE MMC 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID MMC 314 CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL MMC 315 CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION MMC 316 COPY STATION USABLE MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION STATION USE MMC 318 DISTINCTIVE RINGING MMC 319 BRANCH GROUP MMC 320 PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER MMC 326 RBT MESSAGE Samsung Business Communications 1 9 1 1 4
158. MC 101 CID TRANSLATION TABLE MMC 728 CID TRUNKS MMC 425 CLI RINGING MMC 759 COMMON BELL CONTROL MMC 204 CONFERENCE GROUP MMC 118 Samsung Business Communications 1 17 1 Table 1 9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list continued MMC Name MMC No CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL MMC 314 CONNECTION STATUS MMC 434 COPY COS CONTENTS MMC 700 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 720 COPY STATION USABLE MMC 316 COST RATE MMC 433 COSTING DIAL PLAN MMC 746 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER MMC 802 CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY MMC 815 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER STATION MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TENANT MMC 210 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TRUNK MMC 400 CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION MMC 315 DATE DISPLAY MMC 109 DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT MMC 515 DIAGNOSTIC TIME MMC 854 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN MMC 724 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION MMC 714 DISA ALARM RINGING STATION MMC 214 DISTINCTIVE RINGING MMC 318 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT MMC 211 E1 PRI CRC4 OPTION MMC 417 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE MMC 117 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM MMC 800 ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC 830 EXECUTIVE STATE MMC 125 EXTENSION TYPE MMC 221 FAX PAIR MMC 222 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE MMC 407 H 323 GK OPTIONS MMC 836 H 323 OPTIONS MMC 834 HALT PROCESSING MMC 810 1 18 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Table 1 9 A
159. MC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications 2 75 CHAPTER 2 303 ASSIGN BOSS SECRETARY Assigns BOSS phones to SECRETARY phones One BOSS station can have up to and in cluding four SECRETARY stations and one SECRETARY station can have up to and in cluding four BOSS stations CONDITIONS e Adedicated BOSS button must be programmed on the SECRETARY phone s e Adedicated BOSS button must also be programmed on the BOSS phone Astation designated as BOSS may not be assigned as a secretary of another BOSS DEFAULT DATA NONE PROGRAM BUTTONS F BUTTON Used to toggle BOSS SECRETARY field ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 303 BOSS STN NONE Display shows SECR 1 NONE 2 Dial BOSS station number e g 205 BOSS STN 205 OR SECR 1 NONE Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button 3 Dial SECRETARY number 1 2 3 or 4 BOSS STN 205 OR SECR 1 NONE Press Volume button to select number and press Right Soft button 4 Dial SECRETARY station number e g 201 BOSS STN 205 OR SECR 1 201 Press Volume button to select station Press Right Soft button to return to step 3 to BOSS STN 205 enter more SECR numbers SECR 2 202 5 Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 and continue entries OR Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to a
160. MGI 3 CODEC FRAME 2 3 2 308 Display shows the first option Enter MGI type 0 2 via dial keypad OR G 729A 40 MS G 729A 40 MS Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter MGI DSP parameter via dial keypad OR MGI3 CODEC FRAME MGI3 CODEC FRAME G 729A 40 MS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter MGI DSP parameter MGI3 CODEC FRAME OR G 729A 20 MS Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS Samsung Business Communications 2 309 CHAPTER 2 836 H 323 GK OPTIONS Provides a means to set the H 323 gatekeeper parameters for an optional external industry standard H 323 network gatekeeper using Registration Admissions and Status signalling RAS The settings apply system wide NOTE When changing IP SS When changing any IP address value listed below three digits must be input for each octet field Example 192 168 1 10 input must be 192 168 001 010 No Parameter Description Default
161. Mi 20 The group members will be the VM ports 1 RING MODE 2 168 Each group can have one of the following ring modes This will decide how calls are placed to the group 0 SEQUENTIAL The stations listed as members see below will be called on a first available basis Calls will first go to the first mem ber if the first member is busy calls will go to the second member if the second member is busy calls will go to the third member and so on This type of group is useful for placing the bulk of the incoming calls with a selected individual and other members only getting the calls when that member is busy The number of members allowed for a sequential group is 48 1 DISTRIBUTED The first call will go to the first member the second call will go to the second member the third call will go to the third member This type of group is useful for evenly distributing the call among all group members The number of members allowed for a distributed group is 48 2 UNCONDITIONAL Calls are placed to all group members simulta neously This reduces the number of members of the groups to 32 If a group member is busy they can receive off hook ring if defined in MMC 300 This ring mode option is not available for UCD or VMAA groups The SGR INC BUSY option is not available for unconditional ring mode Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide No Option 2 OVERFLOW co
162. N all station groups will follow this setting 9 ALLOUT NEXT If all members are log out the call would be send to next port 10 RBT MSG If set ON coloring service can be used by using svmi message NOTE group Calls to a group Calls to a group do not follow the call forwarding instructions of any station in the Samsung Business Communications 2 169 CHAPTER 2 CONDITIONS Astation can be assigned to all station groups A station group can accommodate up to 32 members e To enable off hook ring for incoming calls to busy members set OFFHOOK RING in MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER STATION to ON Even in this case however the off hook ring is enabled only when the RING MODE is UNCONDITIONAL DEFAULT DATA NORMAL GROUP ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 601 501 STN GROUP Display shows TYPE NORMAL GRP 2 Dial group number e g 505 505 STN GROUP OR YPE NORMAL GRP Press Volume button to select group and Press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial feature option number 0 7 e g 0 505 STN GROUP OR TYPE VMAA GROUP Press Volume button to scroll options and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 DIAL group type e g 1 505 STN GROUP OR TYPE VMAA GROUP Press Volume button to make selection and press Left Soft button to move cursor to TYPE 5 Dial feature option number 0 6 e g
163. N TRUNK SIGNAL Allows the assignment of analogue DID or E amp M cards for proper signalling These trunks can also use the translation tables in MMC 714 No Signalling condition type 0 IMMEDIATE START 1 DELAYED START 2 WINK START 3 NO ANSWER BACK 4 DIRECT BACK CONDITIONS An analogue E amp M DID Trunk card must be installed in the OfficeServ 7100 system Oth erwise the NO E amp M DID TRUNK message is displayed DEFAULT DATA IMMEDIATE START ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 412 701 TRK SIGNAL Display shows IMMEDIATE START 2 Enter desired trunk number e g 705 705 TRK SIGNAL OR IMMEDIATE START Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR Select all trunks ALL TRK SIGNAL IMMEDIATE START 3 Enter desired trunk type selection from above list 705 TRK SIGNAL OR WINK START Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION 2 112 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 414 MPD PRS SIGNAL Used on a per trunk basis to define if a Trunk line is to be either a Metering Pulse Detec tion MPD or a Polarity Reversal Signal PRS trunk An MPD Trunk will
164. NAME 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each system speed dial location This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the directory dial fea ture ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME DEFAULT DATA NO NAMES PROGRAM BUTTONS ANS RLS Used to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation 728 DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 706 SYS SPEED NAME Display shows 500 2 Dial system speed entry number e g 505 SYS SPEED NAME OR 505 Press Volume button to select entry number press Right Soft button to move cursor Samsung Business Communications 2 201 CHAPTER 2 3 Enter name using dial keypad and press Right Soft SYS SPEED NAME button to return to step 2 505 TELECOMS OR Press the F key to return to MMC 706 step 3 SYS SPEED DIAL 505 _ 4 If you want to save the speed dial number and name SYS SPEED NAME data to the CLI translation table MMC 728 ADD CLI XLT NO Press ANS RLS button and dial 1 for YES The speed dial number must exist 5 Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above OR Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK MMC 705
165. NG 0400 0200 0400 2000 DOOR RING 0400 0100 0400 2000 ALM RING 0400 0200 0400 3000 CBK RING 1000 4000 1000 4000 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 510 1 STN RING 0400 Display shows 0200 0400 3000 2 Dial cadence number from above list e g 3 3 DOOR RING 0400 OR 0100 0400 2000 Press Volume button to select Press Left Soft button and advance to step 3 3 Dial new value for interrupt times 3 DOOR RING 0100 must be four digits 9900 0100 9900 Press Right Soft button to advance cursor Press Left Soft button to retreat cursor If valid entry system returns to step 2 Samsung Business Communications 2 159 CHAPTER 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 160 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 511 MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE This MMC defines the cadence flash rate of single line telephone message waiting lamps on phones connected to systems with an MWSLI card There are two choices for the MW lamp cadence continuous and interrupted No Item Description 0 INTERRUPTED The MW lamp will flash at a rate determined by the timer settings The shortest on time is 100 ms and the longest on time is 3000 ms The timer is adjusted in 100 ms increments 1 CONTINUOUS When an MWSLI port has a message the lamp will be lit
166. NO ANS FWD 015 SEC DUR 100 MSEC F DGT DELY 600 MSEC OFFHK SEL 008 SEC EFWD DELAY 010 SEC CC RNG DLY 010 SEC Samsung Business Communications 2 147 CHAPTER 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press Transfer button and enter 502 Display shows Dial station number e g 205 OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button OR Select all stations and press Right Soft button Enter new value must be three digits via dial keypad e g 020 System will return to step 2 Dial timer number from above list e g 1 OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter new timer value must be four digits e g 0200 System returns to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 102 CALL FORWARD MMC 306 2 148 HOT LINE OFF HOOK SELECTION DISPLAY 201 NO ANS FWD 015 SEC 205 NO ANS FWD 015 SROS ALL NO ANS FWD 205 NO ANS FWD 015 SEC 3020 205 DIME DUR 0100 MS gt _ LAO Si 0100 MS 0200 Samsu ng Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 503 TRUNK WIDE TIMERS Allows certain trunk timer values to be changed on a per trunk basis or for all trunks No Item Description Range 00 ANS BAK TM A
167. NSWER BACK TIME This timer is used for certain types of E amp M signalling and does not affect normal CO lines 0 2500 MSEC 01 02 CLEARING CO SUPV TM This timer ensures that a call is fully disconnected at the CO by preventing CO access outgoing or receiv ing incoming ring between a disconnect and the expiration of this timer 100 9900 MSEC CO SUPERVISION TIME this is the minimum length of loop open disconnect received from the CO that will be seen as a valid hang up on the sys tem 10 2500 MSEC 03 DTMF DUR DTMF DURATION This is the length of the DTMF digits that will be sent to the CO on this line 100 9900 MSEC 04 F DGT DELY First DIGIT DELAY This is the length of time the system will wait for CO line conditions to stabilize after seizure before sending DTMF digits 100 9900 MSEC 05 FLASH TIME This is the duration of the momentary open sent on a circuit FLASH key is pressed 20 2500 MSEC 06 07 NO RING TM PAUSE TIME This is the length of time the system will wait after detecting a ring burst on a line before deciding the call has disconnected This is the length of time the system will wait before sending the next digit for a pause in a speed dial bin 1 25 SEC 1 25 SEC 08 PRS DET TM This means the duration of PRS signal pulse If the PRS signal is reversed when opposite party is an swered and maintain the status before the
168. O08 SIO TxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm Data SIO number SIO x 72 MNFO9 SIO TxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm Data SIO number SIO x 73 MNF10 E1 Out Of Srv E1 Digital line status has been changed to out of ser vice Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 74 MNF 11 E1 In Service E1 Digital line has been restored to normal service Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 75 MNF12 SIO Out IO port has lost DTR Alarm Data SIO number SIO x 76 MNF13 SIO In IO port has regained DTR Alarm Data SIO 1 through 6 77 MNF14 TODC Error Time of Day Clock in the MCP2 has erred 78 MNF15 TSW Over Alarm The TSW has been requested to exceed the capacity of available time slots Maximum 192 per cabinet Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 79 MNF16 PSU Alarm There are more ports than can be supported in a cabinet and more power is required Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued No Code Alarm Name Definition 80 MNF 17 PSU Alarm Over configuration of cabinet has been corrected Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 81 MNF 18 SLI Fault An SLI card has been detected as out of service via an internal CODEC test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 82 MNF 19 SLI Recovery An SLI card detected as out of service has been de tected as
169. OLUME This is the volume setting for the phone ringer There are eight volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest 1 OFF RING VOL This is the volume of the alert tone that tells you there is a call camped on to your phone There are eight volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest 2 HANDSET VOL This is the volume setting for conversations on the handset receiver There are eight volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest 3 SPEAKER VOL This is the receive volume setting for conversations on the speaker phone of a phone There are 16 volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest 4 BGM VOLUME This is the volume you will hear background music over the phone speaker at when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on There are 16 volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest 5 PAGE VOLUME This is the volume you will hear internal page over the phone speaker DEFAULT DATA RING VOLUME 4 OFF HOOK RING VOLUME 4 HANDSET VOLUME 4 SPEAKER VOLUME 13 BGM VOLUME 13 PAGE VOLUME 13 Samsung Business Communications when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on There are 16 volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest 2 27 CHAPTER 2 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 114 201 STN VOLUME Display shows RING VOLUME 4 2 Dial phone number
170. ONE GPIK03 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications 2 227 CHAPTER 2 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING This MMC is similar to MMC 722 Station Key Programming except that changes are made system wide rather than on a per station basis Features are entered via the dial key pad by pressing numbers as shown in the table TYPE OF PHONE No Type of Phone Description 00 24 BTN SETS Phone with 24 program buttons 01 12 BTN SETS Phone with 12 program buttons 03 EU6BSETS EU phone with 6 program buttons 05 48 64 BTN AOMS AOM with 48 64 program buttons 06 20BTN SETS Phone with 20 program buttons 07 28 BTN SETS Phone with 28 program buttons 08 18 BTN SETS Phone with 18 program buttons 09 8BTNSETS Phone with 8 program buttons 10 99BTN SETS Phone with 99 program buttons 11 38 BTN SETS Phone with 38 program buttons 12 21 BTN SETS Phone with 21 program buttons 13 14BTN SETS Phone with 14 program buttons 14 DS 07S SETS 7000 Range phone DIAL KEYPAD COUNT 1 2 3 4 DIAL 2 AB BARGE CAD DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO DIAL 4 GPIK HD
171. Press Volume button to select an user type USER LOCAL ITP Press Right Soft button to move cursor MODE SEQUENTIAL 3 Press Volume button to select an option and USER LOCAL ITP press Right Soft button to move cursor ODE SEQUENTIAL 4 Press Volume button to select and press Right USER LOCAL ITP Soft button to store data and return to step 1 ODE SEQUENTIAL 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 189 CHAPTER 2 616 MGI USER This program selects which specific MGI ports will be dedicated on a per port basis for IP station trunk devices If this MMC is not used allocation of MGI ports will be controlled by MMC 615 By defining dedicated MGI port usage the IP station trunk selected will al ways use the port programmed MGI ports can be assigned for digital stations 2XX 2XXX private and public ITP stations 32XX VoIP Networking trunks 83XX H 323 trunks 84XX SIP trunks 85XX and MGI3 facsimile Only one assignment per MGI port is permitted Any entries made here will override entries made in MMC 615 DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 616 3801 MGI USER Display shows the first available option NONE 2 Enter MGI dial number 3801 MGI USER OR NONE Press Volume button to select an MGI port and press Ri
172. REE 2 Enter desired EXT number e g 205 205 REVW BLOCK OR 10 0060 FREE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Enter valid number for bins e g 50 205 REVW BLOCK OR 50 0010 FREE Press Volume button to make selection OR Press Hold button to delete bin s 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications 2 183 CHAPTER 2 609 CALL LOG BLOCK Provides a means of adding or deleting Call Log blocks for an individual phone With the ability to delete blocks it will not be necessary to waste these on items such as voice mail and DPIMs or phones that do not have displays The free list will show how many bins are left to be assigned The system has 1000 total bins Each phone may be assigned a maxi mum of 50 bins DEFAULT DATA PHONES 10 BINS ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 609 201 LOG BLOCK Display shows first station 10 0070 FREE 2 Enter desired EXT number e g 205 205 LOG BLOCK OR 10 0070 FREE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 3 Enter valid number for bins e g 50 205 LOG BLOCK OR 50 0030 FREE Press Volume
173. REPORTING MMC 852 MMC 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY Samsung Business Communications SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS DISPLAY DIAGNOSTIC TIME SUN LINO 8 DIAGNOSTIC TIME SUNS 235 DIAGNOSTIC TIME SUN 2 530 2 347 CHAPTER 2 856 TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS This MMC lists the date time and entry location of the last eight times that technician level programming was accessed This allows a technician to determine if there was unau thorized access to system programming and where this access occurred The information stored in this log is displayed for each of the eight accesses as follows first line shows the start date and time of access second line shows the access type see table and end date and time of access There are four access types Type Description NNNN The extension number of a phone that accessed programming directly e g 3203 MODEM Programming was accessed by PCMMC via the integrated V90 modem attached to the IOM board of the main cabinet LAN Programming was accessed by PCMMC via the LAN connection on the MCP2 card of main cabinet SIOx Programming was accessed by PCMMC via one of the SIO connections on the IOM DEFAULT DATA board of the main cabinet where x is the number 2 or 3 of the SIO port that was used NONE ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 856 1 11 22 13209 Display shows 3203 4
174. SET ICONF DIAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SETDND DIAL 8 TG UA VG DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP See Programmable Button Assignments in MMC 722 2 228 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide DEFAULT DATA SEE DEFAULT DATA IN MMC 722 ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press Transfer button and enter 723 Display shows Enter type of set via dial keypad e g 1 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button Enter key number e g 03 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button Using table above press dial keypad to select number OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 5 to enter extender if required OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 Enter extender if required e g 03 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS DISPLAY EYP oai CATTIS TENN EYE CALL1 gt SID S EIKS 03 03 BS NONEDGPIK Boule SELS 03 GPIK GPIK03 MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGR
175. ST RATE These rate tables correlate with the Trunk Cost Rate and the Costing Dial Plan There are eight call costing rates Each rate has the following data fields No Type Description 0 1ST DUR This is the amount of time at the beginning of each call to which a FIRST INTERVAL fixed cost is applied DURATION The range is 0 999 seconds e g 180 seconds three minutes 1 1ST COST This is the cost for the first interval duration in s sterling or Euros FIRST INTERVAL The range is 0 to 999 e g 345 3 45 or 3 45 COST 2 2ND DUR This is the duration of each billing increment after the first interval SECOND INTER has expired VAL DURATION The range is 0 999 seconds e g 006 seconds six seconds 3 2ND COST This is the cost for each billing increment in s sterling or Euros SECOND INTER after the first interval has expired VAL COST The range is 0 999 e g 100 1 00 or 1 00 4 SURCHARGE This is a one time charge in s sterling or Euros that is applied to the call over and above the time charges The range is 0 999 e g 150 1 50 or 1 50 NOTE Currency values or Currency values or depend on the setting for the USE EURO option in MMC 210 DEFAULT DATA ALL COST RATES NO DATA ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 747 Display shows 2 Dial COST RATE number 1 8 e g 3 OR Press Volume button to select COST RATE and press Right Soft button to
176. STATION ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 221 201 PHONE USE Display shows NORMAL STATION 2 Dial station number e g 214 214 PHONE USE OR NORMAL STATION Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 2 66 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 3 Dial 0 5 to select station type 214 PHONE USE OR GUEST NO SMOKING Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION Samsung Business Communications 2 67 CHAPTER 2 222 Enables a guest room to have normal phone line and fax line simultaneously Only Guest No Smoking Room or Guest Smoking Room can be assigned a fax pair station which is already assigned as a fax station in MMC 221 DEFAULT DATA NONE CONDITIONS This MMC can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION This MMC can be used only when there is station that set GUEST SMOKING GUEST NO SMOKING in MMC 222 and if not display NOT EXIST ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 222 201 FAX PAIR Display shows NONE 2 Dial guest extension number e g 205 205 FAX PAIR OR NONE Press Volume button to se
177. Screen edad eed chee 1 hiinc hususp m SAFETY CONCERNS V V E E HR VI IS AUNT OID erste tn oo can einer VI CHAPTER 1 Overview of MMC Programming 1 1 1 14 Introduction to 10 eene ennt nnn 1 1 1 2 Digital Phones 1 2 1 2 1 DCS Eur Phones cH PORE UR DERE ET MET EDD E To ERE ERES ERR EDDA 1 2 1 2 2 DS ITP 5000 Series Phones imer rers repa sa tenevssteeandsceteeauerreeabgacs aiai 1 3 1 3 Cautions in Programming 1 6 1 4 Program List by User s 1 7 1 4 1 Station Level Programming eiie eitti se doin d ees 1 7 1 4 2 Operator Level Programming 2 stet nire aaaea 1 8 1 5 Programming List by Name eeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeenee nennen 1 16 1 6 Program List by Function eeeeeesesee sensisse eene e nennen nna nnn nn natns 1 23 16
178. T TRANSLATION E LCR2 NONE SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION E LCR3 NONE SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION E LCR4 NONE SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION FAUTO 14 FORCED AUTO ANSWER FLASH 49 FLASH FWD 60 CALL FORWARD Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued Feature Default Description GRPK 66 GROUP PICKUP HDSET NONE HEADSET MODE HLDPK 12 HOLD PICKUP HOLD 11 HOLD HOTEL NONE HOTEL Hotel Feature ICONF NONE ISDN 3 PARTY CONFERENCE IDISC NONE ISDN 3 PARTY DISCONNECTION IG 53 IN OUT GROUP IHOLD NONE ISDN 3 PARTY HOLD INFDSP NONE INFORMATION DISPLAY Requires News Call Plus IRET NONE ISDN 3 PARTY RETRIEVE LCR LEAST COST ROUTING LISTN NONE GROUP LISTENING LNR 19 LAST NUMBER REDIAL LOG NONE CALL LOGGING MMPA 56 MEET ME PAGE ANSWER MMPG 54 MEET ME PAGE MSG 43 MESSAGE MYGRPK 28 MY PICKUP GROUP CALL PICKUP NEW NONE NEW CALL NOCLIP NONE NO CID SEND NPAGE NONE NETWORK PAGE OHVA NONE OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE OPER 0 OPERATOR PAGE 55 PAGE PAGPK 10 PICKUP PAGE HOLD PARK NONE CALL PARK ORBIT PMSG 48 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE PTHR NONE PATH REPLACEMENT RB NONE ROOM BILL Hotel Feature REJECT NONE OHVA REJECT RP NONE RING PLAN RSV NONE ROOM STATUS VIEW Hotel Feature RTO NONE RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE SELFID NONE SELF SYSTEM ID Samsung Business Communications 2 233 CHAPTER 2
179. TEM REFERENCE CLOCK The system clock may be synchronized with an external clock source from the TEPRI or BRI card or it can use the internal clock source This MMC can assign the system clock source priority when the external clock source is used DEFAULT DATA PRIORITY 1 C1 SO PRIORITY 2 C1 S1 PRIORITY 3 SELF ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 826 REFERENCE CLOCK RIORITY 1 1 50 Ing Display shows 2 Dial the priority number REFERENCE CLOCK OR 1 1 50 Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial the priority data REFERENCE CLOCK OR RIORITY 1 1 50 Press Volume button to select and Press Right Soft button to store y 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 294 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS This program sets the various parameters required for printing to a LAN connected device The data listed below can be printed 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 The items that are set in this program SMDR UCD REPORT TRAFFIC REPORT ALARM REPORT UCD VIEW PERIODIC UCD HOTEL REPORT PMS No Option Default Description 00 DATA TYPE Type of data to be dis
180. TION group number FIRST MSG 61 OR Press Left Soft button to position cursor under 530 UCD OPTION message number and enter new message FIRST MSG 25 OR Press Right Soft button and advance to next option 530 UCD GROUP using the Volume buttons to select an option UCD RECALL 10 SEC 3 Press Right Soft button and advance to next option 530 UCD OPTION Use the Volume buttons to make a selection UCD RECALL 10 SEC OR Make a selection using the dial keypad 4 Press Left Soft button to enter the selection and 530 UCD OPTION to return to step 1 EXIT CODE NONE OR Press Right Soft button to return to step 3 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP 2 182 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK Provides a means of adding or deleting CID review blocks to an individual phone With the ability to delete a block or blocks of CID review it will not be necessary to waste these on items such as voice mail and DPIMs or phones that do not have displays The free list will show how many bins are left to be assigned The system has 1000 total bins Each phone may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins DEFAULT DATA PHONES 10 BINS ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 608 201 REVIEW BLK Display shows first station 10 0060 F
181. TRK COS Select all trunks 180 2501 5901 Enter ring plan class of service e g 05 705 COS OR 1805 2201 9301 Use Volume button to scroll through classes of ser vice and press Right Soft button to advance to step 4 OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of ser vice and press Left Soft button to return to step 2 Enter the next ring plan class of service e g 05 705 COS OR 1205 2305 Ogi Use Volume button to scroll through classes of ser vice and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of ser vice and press Left Soft button to return to the previ ous step Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS 2 126 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 423 S T MODE Allows the technician to select whether a BRI circuit is a station port or a trunk port No Type Description 0 TRUNK The BRI trunk port used for ISDN trunk 1 STATION The BRI trunk port used for ISDN phone CONDITIONS The BRI card must be installed in the system otherwise the message BRI CARD is displayed DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 423 725 S T MODE Display shows first BRI TRUNK 2 Dial trunk number e g 727 727 S T MODE OR TRUNK Use Volume
182. TY VMMSG VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY DISCONNECTION Requires SVMi card IG IN OUT GROUP IHOLD ISDN 3 PARTY HOLD INFDSP INFORMATION DISPLAY Requires News Call Plus INQIRE INQUIRE IRET ISDN 3 PTY RETRIEVE ISPY CID SPY VT VOICEMAIL TRANSFER WAKEUP WAKE UP Hotel Feature LCR LEAST COST ROUTING XCHIN EXPRESS CHECK IN Hotel Feature LISTN GROUP LISTENING LNR LAST NUMBER REDIAL LOG CALL LOGGING MMPA MEET ME PAGE ANSWER Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide DEFAULT DATA For phones buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default Other settings depend on the keyset type For AOMs all buttons are set as DSS buttons by default ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 722 201 KEY MAST Display shows 01 CALL1 gt Enter selected station number e g 205 205 KEY MAST OR 01 CALL1 gt Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter selected key number e g 18 201 KEY MAST OR 18 NONE2 Press Volume button to select key number and press Right Soft button to move cursor Using table above press dial keypad to select num 201 KEY PROG ber 18 NONEDGPIK_ OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 5 to enter extender if required or to return to step 2 Enter extender if required e g 03 201 KEY PROG OR 18 N
183. Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial the feature number NETWORK COS 02 OR 03 PATH RSV Y Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter 0 for NO or 1 for YES NETWORK COS 01 OR 03 CC PATH RSV N Press Volume button to select YES or NO and Press Right Soft button to store data 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS Samsung Business Communications 2 289 CHAPTER 2 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION Assigns the digit translation table used for networking Generally under networking condi tions you must dial the node ID and extension number to call the another node extension In this MMC the system provides a simple digit translation so that the user need only dial the extension number to call the station on the other node The access digit needs to be pro grammed in MMC 724 NTWK LCR DIAL NO option first The system allows 96 en tries for network dial translation DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 290 Press Transfer button and enter 824 Display shows Dial the entry number OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter digit string for access to node max 8 digits and press Right Soft button to move c
184. W cs CALL STATUS RP RING PLAN CSNR CALLER ID SAVE NUMBER RSV ROOM STATUS VIEW REDIAL Hotel Feature DGPALM EASY ALARM SET TO RTO RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE REMOTE STATION DICT DICTATION SETDND SET DO NOT DISTURB DIR DIRECTORY SETMG SET MESSAGE W O RING DIVERT EXECUTIVE CALLDIVERT SG STATION GROUP TO SECRETARY DLOCK DOOR LOCK SLOCAT STAFF LOCATOR Hotel Feature SMDR SMDR KEY DND DO NOT DISTURB SNR SAVED NUMBER REDIAL DNDO DO NOT DISTURB SP UCD SUPERVISOR OVERRIDE DP DIRECT PICKUP SPD SPEED DIAL DROP CALL DROP SPKR SPEAKER DS DSS KEY SSET ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE Samsung Business Communications SET 2 225 CHAPTER 2 2 226 continued Feature Description Feature Description DT DTS KEY STATE SET EXECUTIVE STATE ECT EXPLICIT CALL TRANSFER EP ESTABLISHED CALL STORE STORE DISPLAYED NUMBER PICKUP EXTMIC EXTERNAL MIC SYSALM SYSTEM ALARMS TCLIP TEMP CLIP FAUTO FORCED AUTO ANSWER TG TRUNK GROUP FLASH FLASH TIMER TIMER FWRD CALL FORWARD TP TERMINAL PORTABILITY TRARPT TRAFFIC REPORT GPIK GROUP PICKUP TRSF TRANSFER HDSET HEADSET MODE UA UNIVERSAL ANSWER HLDPK HOLD PICKUP HOLD HOLD VOICE MAIL Requires SVMi card HOTEL HOTEL Hotel Feature VMADM VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION Requires SVMi card ICONF ISDN 3 PTY CONFERENCE VMAME ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION Requires SVMi card IDISC ISDN 3 P
185. Y OR STN 2012BUSY Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return step 3 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS 2 346 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME Provides a means to set the Diagnostic Time The system diagnostics tests include memory audits internal loopback tests on digital trunks and DSP AA DSP tests Additional tests include CODEC tests on analogue trunk and station cards and tone tests If the diagnostics cannot complete the tests because of system traffic the system will abort the tests and retry during the next programmed diagnostic time It is recommended to assign the diagnostic time during non peak traffic periods DEFAULT DATA NO DIAGNOSTIC TIME SET ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 854 2 3 4 5 Display shows Enter weekday number 0 Sun 1 Mon 6 Sat OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter hour 24 hour clock via the dial keypad Cursor will advance to next entry Enter minutes 24 hour clock via the dial keypad Cursor will return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 851 ALARM
186. a MCP BASE ESM 1 ESM 2 or ESM 3 2 338 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued No Code Alarm Name Definition MJB LCP TASK Error LCP or TASK Fault 08 MJBO01 HDLC Com Error Communications to LCP lost or faulty 09 MJB02 Memory Alarm 1 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the MCP2 10 MJBO03 Memory Alarm 2 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in cabinet 1 SCP2 11 MJB04 Memory Alarm 3 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in cabinet 2 LCP2 12 MJBO05 Memory Alarm 4 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in cabinet 3 LCP2 13 MJBO06 IPC MSGQ Over IPC TX queue full error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm data IPC Queue type MCP LAN MCP SCP MCP LCP1 MCP LCP2 14 MJBO7 Task MSGQ Over Task MSG queue full error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm data Error Task MJC DSP Error System DSP Fault 16 MJCO1 DTMF Fault An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system DTMF resources Alarm data DTMF Receiver DSP position 17 MJC02 Tone Fault An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system tone resources Alarm data Receiver DSP position 25 MJC10 Fault An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card DTMF resources Alarm data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 26 MJC11 AA MFR Rec An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card DTMF resources has recovered Alar
187. aiting option if needed so that a second incoming DID call can be received The table is also used to define which MOH source a caller to that DID number will hear when placed on hold A name up to 11 characters can be added to the number There is a maximum of 999 entries If there is no matching number on DID service the call is routed to the opera tor group Option Description DGT Digits to be received from Trunk line up to 16 digits may be entered MOH SOURCE Allows the technician to select what the calling party will hear if the call is placed on hold There are four possible music selections PRI DID priority option There are nine priority levels priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest When calls come into a station group and all group members are busy the system will assign a priority to the DDI numbers so that calls from a high priority DDI number will be placed at the front of the group queue If this option is set to NO the call held longest in the group queue has the highest priority RING PLAN Ring plan and destination during each ring plan The destination can be a 1 XXX 2 XXX station station group trunk or trunk group If a trunk or trunk group is se 3 XXX 4 XXX lected the trunks must be programmed as E amp M trunks to allow the re 5 XXX 6 XXX ceived digits to be re sent This is referred to as DID Repeat digits over tie line Entering the character B means
188. al Displays the MAC ADDRESS of the registered ter 3301 MAC ADDR minal Register the USER ID of the terminal 3301 USER ID 12302 Register the PASSWORD of the terminal 3301 PASSWORD 0000 Register the INSERT DGT for the terminal 3301 INSERT DGT These digits will be automatically inserted in front of user dialling digits when there are more than 4 digits and they do not start with the trunk ac cess code or feature code RELATED ITEMS MMC 848 WLAN IP MAC LIST MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION Samsung Business Communications 2 331 CHAPTER 2 848 WLAN IP MAC LIST This MMC is used when viewing the IP list assigned to WLAN or when creating a new IP list This IP address is automatically assigned to WIP 5000M during a new registration procedure If the IP address is already assigned the assigned terminal number will be shown in the USED field Also the MMC is used to set MAC addresses in the terminal in order to use the wireless LAN not yet implemented DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 Press Transfer button and enter 848 Select the menu 0 IP LIST 1 MAC LIST Select the table number Enter the IP ADDRESS A number next to USED indicates the terminal num ber to which the IP ADDRESS was assigned RELATED ITEMS MMC 846 MMC 849 2 332 WIP INFORMATION WLAN CONFIGURATION DISPLAY OO USED Os O
189. ammed station or trunk will ring with the CALLBACK ring ca dence CONDITIONS e Digital phone keyset rings are distinguished by their tone If the T TONE of the call ing internal external phone is set to NO the bell rings according to the normal set ting in MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE for the receiving station If T is set to 1 8 the bell rings according to the designated ring tone SLT rings are distinguished by their ringing interval If the of the call ing internal external phone is set to NO the bell rings according to the interval set in MMC 510 SLI RING CADENCE for each calling station type If C is set to 1 5 the bell rings according to that interval regardless of the calling station type Samsung Business Communications 2 91 CHAPTER 2 DEFAULT DATA T NO FOLLOW STATION SETTING C NO FOLLOW STATION SETTING ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 318 201 RING TONE Display shows first station T NO C NO PRI NO Dial trunk or station number e g 705 705 RING TONE OR T NO C NO PRI NO Press Volume button to select trunk or station and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial 1 8 to select ring tone 705 RING TONE OR T35 CINO PRTENO Press Volume button to select ring tone and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial 1 5 to select ring cadence 705 RING
190. an be used for special characters space amp T 15 13 T5 lt 225 i it a pho m N 5 meo DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 405 FOL CO rmi Wo Display shows 2 Dial trunk e g 704 704 CO TEL NO OR Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Enter trunk number using the dial keypad 704 CO TEL NO 3054264100 4 Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 404 TRUNK NAME Samsung Business Communications 2 105 CHAPTER 2 406 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT Enables ringing to a specific station or to a group of stations when incoming calls are re ceived This MMC controls ring plan destinations for ring down trunks If the ring plan destinations are not entered the default ring plan is ring plan 1 DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS RING DEFAULT OPERATOR GROUP ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 Press Transfer button and enter 406 Display shows Dial trunk number e g 704 OR Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor OR Select all Dial ring plan number or press Right Soft button to move to the next step Dial station number or station group number e g 2
191. an or system administrator can then display the other parties in the conference If a station or trunk is in an idle state the display will show IDLE If the station or trunk selected is not a valid selection the display will show IN VALID DATA If the station or trunk is made busy by the CPU the display will show MADE BUSY If the station is in busy state with no other connection the display will show BUSY only DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY Display trunk connection status 1 Press Transfer button and enter 434 DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE 2 Enter station or trunk number DISPLAY STATUS Display show connection status Jg 227 3 Enter another station or trunk DISPLAY STATUS OR 702 227 Press Transfer button to exit Display station connection status 1 Press Transfer button and enter 434 DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE 2 Enter station or trunk number DISPLAY STATUS Display show connection status 235 TLS 3 Enter another station or trunk DISPLAY STATUS OR 235 FAS Press Transfer button to exit 2 134 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Display trunk status in conference 1 Press Transfer button and enter 434 2 Enter station or trunk number Display shows connection status 3 Press Right Soft button to display the next station or trunks involved 4 Enter another station or trunk OR Press Transfer button to exit Display status no connec
192. and enter 761 AX RATE 1 Display shows YPE VAL 00 00 2 Enter valid tax number e g 2 via dial keypad AX RATE 2 OR YPE VAL 00 00 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 0 for 1 for C or 2 for T AX RATE 2 Refer to table above YPE C VAL 00 00 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Samsung Business Communications 2 261 CHAPTER 2 4 Enter the tax rate or value via dial keypad AX RATE 2 OR KER CEVAT Ol 25 Press Volume button to make selection If valid entry system advances cursor 5 Enter name and press Right Soft button to return to TAX RATE 2 step 2 NAME MIA BED 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE 2 262 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 762 ROOM COST RATE This MMC allows the technician to set up the cost rates for a week Each room cost rate can be assigned with a percentage of the actual room cost from Sunday to Saturday EXAMPLE If you set SUN 150 1 MON 100 2 TUE 090 Then if you set 100 as the room cost when checking in a guest the real room cost will be 150 on Sunday 100 on Monday and 90 on Tuesday CON
193. ansfer button and enter 504 MAKE BREAK RATIO Display shows 33 MAKE 2 Dial 0 or 1 for option PULSE PER SECOND OR 10 PPS gt _ Press Volume button for selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial new value PULSE PER SECOND System returns to step 2 10 PPS gt 20 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE 2 152 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME Allows the system date and time to be set This will set the system wide clock Type Description Range YY Year 00 99 MM Month 01 12 DD Date 01 31 W Day 0 6 0 SUN 1 MON 2 TUE 3 WED 4 THU 5 FRI 6 SAT HH Hour 00 23 MM Minute 00 59 DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 505 OLD 0111095 0901 Display shows NEW YYMMDDW HHMM 2 Enter new time and date using above table OLD 0111095 0901 System returns to step 2 3 Verify time and date Re enter if necessary NEW 0111121 1445 OLD 0111121 1445 NEW YYMMDDW HHMM 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS AUTO UPDATE TIME Samsung Business Communications CHAPTER 2 506 TONE CADENCE Provides the a
194. ased on the RFC2543 specification The range is 0 9900 ms Default 500 ms Register the RE TRANS 2 The maximum re transmission time if no answer based on the RFC2543 specification The range is 0 9900 ms Default 4000 ms CWBS1 0 OW 9 0 IE CWBS1 MASK A CWBS1 GATEWAY Os OW WO 0 CWBS1 MAC ADDR JONI ACES CWBS1 VERSION EES TATUS CWBS1 CHAN UWS Chet 1 5 CWBS1 TX POWER DEFAULT CWBS1 PARA CLR ARE YOU SURE NO SIUE Hi EVAN 000500MS SLE a2 004000MS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Register the RE TRANS T4 The time the User Agent SIP RE TRANS T4 Server waits after receiving the ACK message 005000MS Based on the RFC2543 specification The range is 0 9900 ms Default 5000 ms Register the GEN RING TM The server retransmits SIP GEN RING TM the response for this length of time until the 006000MS requested retransmission is received For example the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO The range is 0 99900 ms Default 6000 ms Register the INV RING TM After the client sends SIP INV RING TM ACK for the INVITE Final Response the client 001000MS can not confirm if the server received the ACK mes sage The client waits this long after sending ACK for the Final Response The range is 0 99900 ms Defaul
195. ated e g 5065 via dial key pad and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter the MOH source for this entry OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 3 above 5 Enter priority level via dial keypad 1 9 or NO OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft buttons to advance to next step 6 Enter station or group number for each Ring Plan destination via dial keypad e g 530 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance to next step 2 214 DID DIGIT 001 DGT IDLE eae 0 57 DEM DID DEIGLELE 005 DGT 5065 DED PDC MOH NONE PRI NO DIED urea OOS MOH NONE PRI NO DID DIGIT 005 Ig ose 2E Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 7 Enter call wait option via dial keypad DID DIGIT 005 1 for YES 0 for NO CW N MC 99 DC 0 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance to next step 8 Enter maximum call count via dial keypad 00 99 DID DIGIT 005 OR CW N MC 99 DC 0 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance to next step 9 Enter number or delete digit via dial keypad 0 16 DID DIGIT 005 OR CW N MC 99 DC 0 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance to next step 10 Enter the name via dial keypad and press Right DID DIG
196. ation and date When the busy station is accessed it will function like a locked all station Trunks made busy cannot originate calls Ring down type trunks will still ring the programmed destina tion Common resource equipment such as DSPs CID DSPs and miscellaneous equipment such as page ports and voice mail card ports can also be placed in a maintenance busy state MAINTENANCE BUSY OPTIONS No Option Description 0 TRK Trunks 1 STN Stations 2 PAGE Page Ports 4 DTMFR DTMF Receiver 4 DSP 5 CID CID Receiver 14 DSP 6 R2MFC R2MFC Receiver 8 DSP 7 CONF GRP 01 24 8 MGI MGI Ports DTMFR CID R2MFC DSP If DTMFR CID or R2MFC is selected when DSP is not mounted display will show NONE If mounted display will show IDLE by default DEFAULT DATA ALL IDLE Samsung Business Communications 2 345 CHAPTER 2 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY Display shows busy functions NONE 2 Enter busy function type 0 8 via dial keypad MAINTENANCE BUSY OR STN NONE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter station number MAINTENANCE BUSY OR STN 2012IDLE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Press 1 to make busy or 0 to make idle MAINTENANCE BUS
197. ations 2 61 CHAPTER 2 217 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION This MMC is used to print a traffic report and select options The traffic report can be printed on demand or every hour or at a programmed time each day or for up to three separately timed shifts Automatic printing will always clear the totals When report MANUAL PRINT OUT is selected the options are No Option Description 0 PRINT AND CLEAR A report is printed and all totals are reset to 0 1 PRINTOUT ONLY A report is printed and all the totals are saved 2 CANCEL PRINTOUT Cancels printout When AUTO PRINT is selected the options are No Option Description 0 AUTO PRINT OFF Automatic print feature is disabled 1 DAILY A report is printed at a programmable time every day and all the totals are reset to 0 2 EVERY HOUR A report will be printed every hour 3 THREE TIME SHIFT Up to three separate Start and End times may be programmed to report traffic within different shifts A report is printed at the end of each End time and all totals are reset to 0 When a report is printed the totals represent call statistics accumulated from the date of the last report stated as BEGINNING D amp T up to the date of this printout stated as ENDING D amp T If there are no trunks in a group the trunk group report for that group will not print CONDITIONS If this function
198. ave multiple causes e g PRI errors and synchronization loss will print all associated alarm information if an SIO port is programmed as an ALARM port The specific fault alarm data can be displayed via MMC 851 System Alarm Reporting Alarm Notification Alarm Notification Off On 0 1 determines if the alarm provides a visual and audi ble notification to the System Alarm key station s Pressing the System Alarm key and the release key will silence the audible alarm only at the station that pressed the System Alarm key and the release key See alarm displays table for assignments Alarm Code Definitions No Code Alarm Name Definition MJA MCP2 Error System Fault 01 MJAO1 POR Restart MCP2 restart process has been executed via power on restart POR 02 MJA02 Soft Restart MCP2 restart process has been executed via button reset 03 Reset The system RAM has been cleared via manual ming PCMMC or KMMC resulting in a system reset 04 4 MCP Reset The MCP2 has software exception error Alarm data Reason BUS ERR Restart Bus Error ADDR ERR Restart Address Error ILLEGAL Restart Illegal Opcode ZERO DIVID Restart Zero Divide PRIVILEGE Restart Privilege Violation ENDL LOOP Restart Endless Loop 05 MJAO5 LCP Reset The SCP2 or LCP2 has reset Alarm data Cabinet 1 2 or 3 06 MJAO6 PCM Switching A fault has occurred the Switching Control Alarm dat
199. ay be defined as a one time or TODAY alarm or as a DAILY alarm The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time Alarm numbers are 1 2 and 3 In the case of Station Pair assignments MMC 740 the alarm only rings the station that is programmed and does not ring the paired station DEFAULT DATA ALARMS ARE NOTSET ACTION 2 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press Transfer button and enter 112 Display shows Dial station number e g 205 OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button Dial 1 3 to select alarm e g 1 OR Press Volume button to select alarm and press Right Soft button Enter alarm time in 24 hour clock format e g 1300 for 1pm Dial entry from above list for alarm type e g 2 OR Press Volume button to select alarm type and press Right Soft button to move cursor and return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC No Type Description 0 NOTSET No alarm 1 TODAY Alarm once only 2 DAILY Alarm daily at set time DISPLAY 201 18 gt NOTSET 205 ALM 1 HHMM gt NOTSET 205 ALM 1 gt NOTSET 205 ALM 1 HHMM 1300 NOTSET 205 ALM CLK 1 HHMM 1300 DAILY Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programmin
200. be dial These dial digits may consist of 0 9 and If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access number it will automatically insert the separator DEFAULT DATA NONE PROGRAM BUTTONS B moo ACTION 1 2 3 Used to insert a flash code F Used to insert a pause code P Used to insert a pulse tone conversion code C Used to mask unmask following digits shows as Used to enter name for speed dial bin see MMC 106 DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 105 201 SPEED DIAL Display shows 00 Dial station number e g 205 205 SPEED DIAL OR 00 Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor If selected station has no speed dial bins 205 SPEED DIAL the display will be as shown and a new station SPDBLK NOT EXIST may be selected Dial location number e g 05 205 SPEED DIAL OR 05 Press Volume button to select location and press Right Soft button to move cursor Samsung Business Communications 2 11 CHAPTER 2 4 Enter trunk access code e g 9 followed by 205 SPEED DIAL the number to be dialed e g 4264100 05 9 4264100_ OR Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 Press Hold button to clear an entry If an error is made use VOLUME DOWN arrow
201. ber of WBS24 servicing the terminal 05 IP OFFSET Location of IP pool of the terminal IP 06 IPADDRESS Terminal IP address 0 0 0 0 07 MACADDR Terminal MAC address 0000 0000 0000 08 USERID User ID per terminal 1212 09 PASSWORD Password of terminal user 0000 10 INSERT DGT If five or more numbers are entered into the WIP terminal this INSERT DGT is prefixed to the numbers provided the entered numbers do not start with a C O number C O group number LCR network LCR or function code DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 846 3301 REGISTERED NO 2 Dial the WIP number 3301 REGISTERED OR NO Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Set the items below at the menu Confirm the status of terminal registration for each 3301 REGISTERED phone number NO 2 330 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Displays the location of the registered terminal 3301 LOCATED Displays the PHONE of the registered termi 3301 PHONE nal Displays the WLI NUMBER of the registered ter 3301 WLI NUMBER minal currently not used Displays the WBS NUMBER of the registered ter 3301 WBS NUMBER minal Displays the IP OFFSET of the registered terminal 3301 IP OFFSET Displays the IP ADDRESS of the registered termi 3301 IP ADDRESS n
202. bility to customize the tone cadence on a system wide basis The system pro vides 11 types of tone and three types of tone provided from Central Office or a PBX sys tem can be detected A When changing the MMC 506 MMC 506 should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor No Item Description 00 BUSY TONE The called station is busy 01 CONFM BARGE A feature has been successfully activated cleared or a Barge In with Tone has been performed 02 DIAL TONE The system is ready to interpret key presses dialled digits 03 DND NO MORE The called station is in DND or has no free CALL buttons 04 ERROR TONE An error has been made 05 HOLD CAMPON This is the system generated hold tone 06 MSGWAT TONE This is the tone heard at an SLT with a message waiting 07 RGBACK TONE The called station is ringing 08 RING TONE This is the tone heard from a ROP device or Loud Bell when these de vices are called 09 TRANSFER This is the tone heard when the transfer button is pressed or an SLT TONE hook flashes 10 DID RNGBACK This is the tone heard by the outside party when they dial a DID number 11 CO BUSY This is used to detect the busy tone provided from Central Office or a PBX system 12 CO RINGBACK This is used to detect the ring back tone provided from Central Office or PBX system 13 CO DIAL This
203. buttons to scroll through the options and press Right Soft button to select an option 3 Enter the option data LINE PER PAGE OR 50 LINE PAGE Use the Volume buttons to press Right Soft button to save the data and return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER STATION 2 238 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 727 SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY This MMC is used for system version display only READ ONLY The displays depend which modules are included in the system DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 727 MP10 MAIN VERS Display shows 07 02 26 2 Press Volume button to show other modules e g SP Modules MP10 SP VERS ON OA VMS Modules MP10 VMS VERS 725 421 Oil ois DATA Modules MP10 DATA VI NO VI 3 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications ERS ERSION DATA 2 239 CHAPTER 2 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE Allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID number received from the central office with a name programmed in this translation table If there is no match be tween a received number
204. by these changes MUST be restarted using MMC 418 in order for the changes to become effective DEFAULT DATA For BRI Ports programmed as Trunks CHANNEL ANY YES BRI MODE P P DDI DLSEND OVERLAP CLIP TABLE NONE NB TYPE NATIONAL NB PLAN ISDN For BRI Ports programmed as Stations CHANNEL ANY YES POWER FEED NO Samsung Business Communications 2 119 CHAPTER 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 120 Press Transfer button and enter 419 Display shows first BRI channel Dial BRI trunk number e g 727 OR Press Volume button to select BRI trunk and press Right Soft button Select option item OR Press Volume button to select option item and press Right Soft button Select option OR Press Volume button to select BRI station and press Right Soft button Dial BRI station number e g 729 OR Press Volume button to select BRI station and press Right Soft button Select option item OR Press Volume button to select BRI station and press Right Soft button Select option OR Press Volume button to select option item and press Right Soft button Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC DISPLAY 725 BRI TRK CHANNEL ANY YES 727 BRI TRK CHANNEL ANY YES 727 BRI TRK CHANNEL ANY NO BRI MSN
205. card with any changes in the card setup MMCs and to put these changes into effect CONDITIONS e ABRI card TEPRI or TEPRI2 card must be installed in the system e Before setting the PRI program the J2 jumper of the TEPRI or TEPRI2 card must be set ON to PRI mode DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 418 725 RESTART Display shows first BRI or PRI circuit CARD RESTART NO 2 Dial first trunk on a BRI or PRI card e g 733 733 RESTART OR CARD RESTART NO Press Volume button to select the first trunk and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO 733 RESTART Pressing 1 will advance to step 4 CARD RESTART YES 4 Diall for YES or 0 for NO 733 RESTART Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2 ARE YOU SURE YES 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 419 BRI OPTIONS MMC 420 PRI OPTIONS MMC 423 S T MODE MMC 424 BRI S0 MAPPING Samsung Business Communications 2 117 CHAPTER 2 419 BRI OPTIONS Assigns several options on a per BRI basis There are different options depending on whether the BRI is programmed as a trunk or station in MMC 423 OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS TRUNKS No Option Description 0 CHANNELANY When this option
206. ce cursor to step 3 3 Dial ring plan number 1 6 e g 2 RING PLAN WED 2 OR ST _ END Press Volume button to select day Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 4 4 Dial start time e g 1030 RING PLAN WED 1 If valid cursor moves to end time ST 1030 END 1800 Enter end time If valid system returns to step 2 Begin again 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications 2 157 CHAPTER 2 508 CALL COST Set the Call Cost attributes generated by the system during a call This information can be displayed on the phone during a call or as an SMDR record No Display Description 0 UNIT COST PER When the system is installed to receive metering pulses outgoing call It is used for generating total call cost by multiplying it by the number of pulses Allows a maximum value of 9999 Currency is PENCE or ECENTS depending on USE EURO option setting in MMC 210 1 CALL COST RATE This generates additional call cost calculated by multiply ing this rate by the original call cost Ranges from 100 to 255 CALL COST Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate CAUTION call cost This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection versio
207. ce to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 287 CHAPTER 2 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS Assigns the class of service for networking No Option Default Description 01 CALL OFFER Y Call Offer 04 CC SIG CONN Y CC Retention of Signal Connection 05 CC SVC RETN Y CC Service Retention 06 CCBS N Call Completion to Busy Subscriber 07 CCNR N Call Completion on No Reply 08 CFB Y Call Forward Busy 09 CFNR Y Call Forward No Reply 10 CFU Y Call Forward Unconditional 11 Cl N Call Intrusion 12 Cl CAPABIL 2 Intrusion Capability Level 1 3 14 CI PROTECT 2 Intrusion Protection Level 0 3 23 CONP LEVEL 3 CONP Level 0 none 1 Alert 2 Busy 3 Both 26 CT RE ROUTE N Transfer By Rerouting 27 DND TONE N DND Announcement 28 DNDO Y Do Not Disturb Override 29 DNDO CAPABL 2 DNDO Capability Level 0 3 30 DNDO PROTEC 2 DNDO Protection Level 1 3 31 PAGE Y PAGE 32 PATH REPL Y Path Replacement 33 PATH RETEN N Path Retention CONDITIONS NONE DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION 2 288 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 823 NETWORK COS 01 Display shows 01 CALL OFFER Y 2 Dial the class of service number 01 30 NETWORK COS 02 OR 01 CALL OFFER Press
208. ction via dial keypad HALT PROCESSING OR 1 S ALL OPROC Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor OR Select all cabinets and slots and go to step 4 HALT PROCESSING C ALL S ALL PROC 3 Enter slot number via dial keypad HALT PROCESSING OR Cele EROS Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 4 Enter 1 for HALT or 0 for PROC OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to enter and return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 275 CHAPTER 2 811 RESET SYSTEM Provides a means of restarting the system The system can simply be reset or it can be reset and all memory cleared to default values Extreme care should be taken when using this MMC If the system is restarted all voice data connections are dropped If memory is cleared all customer data is deleted and the system returns to defaulted status No Type Description 0 RESET SYSTEM System reset only with MC card read 1 CLEAR MEMORY System reset and make default system with MC card read 2 FAST RESTART System reset only without MC card read DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 811 SYSTEM RESTART Display
209. d System Access DISA Because there is a possi bility that unauthorized calls will be made via this feature several safeguards have been added Users must be informed of these to prevent unnecessary service calls DISA can lock out when a predetermined number of invalid consecutive calls are attempted Callers will then receive error tone until the programmable timer has expired CONDITIONS e key may be used to initiate new dial tone while in a station to station call e button may be used to terminate the DISA call and disconnect the central office line DISA lines must be assigned to the ring plan s DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS NORMAL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 410 701 123456 Display shows DISA LINE 000000 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 123456 OR DISA LINE 000000 Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button OR ALL 123456 Select all trunks DISA LINE 000000 OR 3 Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan e g 3 704 123456 OR DISA LINE 001000 Using the dial keypad press 1 to select 0 not to se lect the Ring Plan e g 1 to select Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 500 SYSTEM WIDE COUNTERS Samsung Business Communications 2 111 CHAPTER 2 412 ASSIG
210. d is 10000 32 SEND CLIP Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER MMC 323 which pro 1 TABLE vides calling party identification when using the MGI as a SIP gateway This provides station ID of the calling station A single digit value corresponding to the desired table in MMC 323 should be entered here This is only used when MMC 405 value is null 33 INCOMING This option selects how incoming calls are routed when FOLLOW DID MODE the MGI is used as a SIP gateway TRANS 0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING Follows MMC 406 1 FOLLOW DID TRANS Follows MMC 714 default 2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT Follows MMC 724 34 ALLOW GW When using a gatekeeper this permits the SIP gateway DISABLE CHECK to check for gatekeeper presence 35 REGIST T GW System number when registering as a trunking gateway 4100 NUM 36 REGIST S GW System number when registering as a gateway for sta 4200 NUM tions 37 CLIR WITH When this option is enabled the CLIP number is sentto DISABLE NUMBER the network even if the CLIP restriction flag is set Samsung Business Communications 2 313 CHAPTER 2 continued No Parameter Description Default 38 SIP Display the status of registration to the SIP Server NO REGISTERED 39 GW SERVICE When using SIP Server if this option is ENABLE then DISABLE register by user and if DISABLE then register by system number 40 GW DOMAIN Domain name for authorization when
211. defined SELECT COUNTRY RUSSIA CIS si EFAULTING SYSTM ARE YOU SURE NO 2 277 CHAPTER 2 813 HOTEL OPERATION Allows the installing technician to enable the HOTEL feature DEFAULT DATA DISABLE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 813 HOTEL OPERATION Display shows DISABLE 2 Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE HOTEL OPERATION OR ENABLE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO HOTEL OPERATION OR CHANGE NOW NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO HOTEL OPERATION OR ARE YOU SURE YES Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS Hotel Related MMCs 2 278 MMC 221 EXTENSION TYPE MMC 222 FAX PAIR MMC 513 HOTEL TIMER MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE MMC 761 TAX RATE SETUP MMC 762 ROOM COST RATE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 815 CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY This enables the on board customer database SRAM to be copied to the MC Data base MCDB and also allows the MCDB database to be copied to the SRAM A daily save can be programmed to automaticall
212. dministrator or technician to lock or unlock an individual station or all stations simultaneously The three options are as follows No Type Description 0 UNLOCKED Unlocks a locked station 1 LOCKED OUT The phone cannot make calls outside the system It can however make and receive intercom calls and receive incoming Trunk Line calls When in this mode the Hold button will flash slow RED 2 LOCKED ALL The phone cannot make or receive any calls When in this mode the Hold button will light steady RED CONDITIONS e Check if the station lock function is disabled at 301 ASSIGN STATION COS If so the station cannot be locked but a locked station can be unlocked e Astation can be locked or unlocked under any condition when the station is in Opera tor Level Programming or Technician Level Programming DEFAULT DATA ALL STATIONS UNLOCKED 2 2 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION 1 2 3 4 DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 100 201 STN LOCK Display shows UNLOCKED Dial station number e g 205 205 STN LOCK OR UNLOCKED Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL STN LOCK Select all stations 2 Enter 0 to unlock or 1 to lock e g 1 205 STN LOCK OR LOCKED OUT Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Press Transfer button
213. dvance next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING 2 76 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION TRUNK USE Allows you to select which stations are allowed to make calls through lines or to answer calls for C O lines on a station and trunk use group basis CONDITIONS e Stations are set within use group numbers 001 100and trunks are set within use group numbers 101 200 in MMC 614 ASSIGN USE GROUP e Ifa station group is set to NO Dial stations cannot place calls on that trunk group e Jfastation group is set to NO Answer stations cannot answer incoming calls on that trunk group Note MMC 406 Trunk Ring Assignment overrides this MMC for the Answer option DEFAULT DATA DIAL YES ANS YES ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 304 001 USE 101 Display shows DIAL YES ANS YES 2 Dial the station use group number e g 005 005 USE 101 OR DIAL YES ANS YES Press Volume button to select station use group and press Right Soft button OR ALL USE 101 Select all station use groups DIAL YES ANS YES 3 Dial the station use group number e g 101 005 USE 101 OR DIAL YES ANS YES Press Volume button to select trunk use group and press Right Soft button OR 005 USE ALL Select all trunk use groups DIAL YES ANS YES Samsung Business Communications 2 77 CH
214. e listed below three digits must be input for each octet field Example 192 168 1 10 input must be 192 168 001 010 No Parameter Description Default 00 GATEWAY Numeric system identifier up to 12 digits 1234 CALL ID 01 CALLER ID This option controls the calling party identification type ANI TYPE There are 3 possible selections 0 GWID shows the gateway call ID 1 ANI shows the calling station number default 2 IP shows the calling H 323 gateway IP address 05 DEFAULT DIL This allows programming of the default direct in line 5000 NO number when digits are missing or incorrect on an in bound call 06 UDP PORT Sets the UDP port used on a SIP trunk call 5060 TRUNK 07 UDP PORT Sets the UDP port used on a SIP phone call 5070 PHONE 09 RE TRANS The initial re transmission time if there is no answer 500 ms T1 TIME based on the RFC2543 specification The range is 0 9900 ms 10 RE TRANS The maximum re transmission time if there is no answer 4000 ms T2 TIME based on the RFC2543 specification The range is 0 9900 ms 11 RE TRANS The time the User Agent Server waits after receiving the 5000 ms T4 TIME ACK message Based on the RFC2543 specification The range is 0 9900 ms 12 GENERAL The server retransmits the response for this length of 5000 ms RING TM time until the requested retransmission is received For example the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO The range
215. e TEPRI or TEPRI2 card must be set to ON for PRI mode After changing this program run MMC 418 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART to ap ply the new setting DEFAULT DATA CHANNEL ANY YES PRI MODE DDI DLSEND OVERLAP CLIP TABLE NONE NB TYPE NATIONAL NB PLAN ISDN ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 Press Transfer button and enter 420 Display shows Dial first PRI trunk number in PRI card e g 730 OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button Enter option number OR Press Volume button to select option Press Volume button to make selection Then press Right Soft button Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS DISPLAY 2 RI OPTION ANY YES 730 de RI OPTION ANY YES CHANNEL 750 de RI OPTION PRI MODE DDI 730 PRI MODE NORMAL MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER MMC 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER MMC 418 BRI amp PRI CARD RESTART MMC 714 DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION Samsung Business Communications 2 123 CHAPTER 2 421 MSN DIGIT Provides a method of assigning an incoming MSN call to a specific station If any entry in the MSN DIGIT TABLE matches an incoming call s called party number either the spe cific station is alerted if it is programmed to accept the call
216. e cre ated for each directory number with a YES entry Once the Voice Mail database has been created new mailboxes can be added e Through Voice Mail administration e By adding a new mailbox in this MMC If a mailbox is to be removed this must be done through Voice Mail administration If a station that does not have an associated mailbox calls the Voice Mail system it will be answered by the Voice Mail system main greeting CONDITIONS Mailboxes that are needed for users who do not have an extension must be added through Voice Mail programming DEFAULT DATA ALL STATIONS YES ALL GROUPS NO ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 751 ASSIGN MAIL BOX Display shows 201 YES 2 Dial station number ASSIGN MAIL BOX OR 202 YES Press Volume button to scroll the number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES ASSIGN MAIL BOX OR 202 NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 248 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 752 AUTO RECORD This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built In Voice Mail card Specific stations in the phone system can be assigned to automatically record conversations When this option is set all incoming all outgoing or al
217. e cursor 3 Dial 0 3 to select option see the table above 205 EXEC STATE OR IN THE ROOM Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Dial 0 9 to select state e g IN AMEETING 205 EXEC STATE OR IN A MEETING Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC Samsung Business Communications 2 41 CHAPTER 2 RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 42 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 199 SHOW LICENSE STATUS Allows the system administrator or technician to confirm the status Valid or Invalid of the inserted license key No Feature Description 0 MGI MAX The license status for MGI port 1 VMS MAX The license status for VMS port 2 SOFT MAX The license status for SoftPhone max 3 SOFT USE The license status for SoftPhone use 4 SOFT CON The license status for SoftPhone connect 5 NEWS USE The license status for NEWS USE DEFAULT DATA INVALID ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 199 SHOW LICENSE STS MGI MAX INVALID 2 Use Volume buttons to confirm the status of the in LICENSE STS serted license key VMS MAX 8 3 Press Transfer button to exit OR Press Speaker but
218. e outgoing caller will hear the confirm tone CO CO DISCONNECT 20 1 250 MIN This timer monitors the duration of an unsu pervised conference when it expires both trunks are disconnected CONFIRM TONE TM 1000 100 2500 The tone heard when a feature is activated or MSEC deactivated CRD TONE INT TM 30 0 250 SEC This is the call record tone interval time An entry other than zero will cause a tone to be heard by all the parties in a recorded conversation The range for the tone is 001 every second to 255 every 255 seconds A value of 000 means no tone Requires an SVMi card DIAL PASS TIME 3 0 25 SEC This timer monitors the time before connect ing the transmit of the phone to the trunk side of an outgoing call DISA DISCONNECT 30 1 250MIN This timer controls the maximum duration of a DISA call DISALOCK OUT TM 30 1 250 This timer controls how long a DISA call is not allowed to be made after the DISA error counter has expired MMC 500 DISA NOANS DISC 30 0 250 SEC This timer determines when a DISA call is disconnected by force when a called party does not answer DISA PASS CHECK 30 1 250MIN This timer defines the period before the sys tem clears the incorrect passcode counter DISA NO ACTION 10 0 250 SEC This timer controls how long a DISA line will wait for further action from the caller DISPLAY DELAY TM 2 1 250 This timer controls how long a display is shown in the LCD and how long error
219. e system will recognize as an SLT hang up INQUIRY RELEASE 30 1 250 SEC This timer monitors the duration of the interac tion of the Soft button to determine when to return the LCD back to a normal status This timer affects only display phones INTER DIGIT TIME 10 1 250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before dropping the call and returning you back to error tone ISDN INT DGT TM 7 1 15 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits and the end of the dialling string on an ISDN call KMMC LOCK OUT TM 30 10 50 SEC This timer controls the grace period between programming actions while in a programming session The timer automatically retums the sys tem to secure programming status LCR ADVANCE TIME 5 1 250 SEC This timer controls the time before selecting the next allowable route when a station is allowed to route advance LCR INTER DIGIT 5 1 250SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before accessing a trunk LONG KEY DETECT 600 0 2500 This timer controls the time a key must be held MSEC down before the key press is repeated LONG KEY REPEAT 300 0 2500 This timer controls the time between repeated MSEC digits on a long key press MCL DELAY TIME 4 0 9 This timer controls the time when the system Samsung Business Communications should start transmitting Authorisation Code after sending MCL access code Cable amp W
220. ectory numbers are changed or assigned Default 8501 8508 FEATURE NUMBERING DIAL KEYPAD COUNT 1 2 3 4 DIAL 2 AB BARGE CAD DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO DIAL 4 GPIK HDSET ICONF DIAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SETDND DIAL 8 TG UA VG DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP Samsung Business Communications 2 231 CHAPTER 2 2 232 Feature Code Assignments and Default Feature Default Description ABAND 64 ABANDONED CALL ABS NONE ABSENCE ABW NONE AGENT BUSY WRAP UP ACCT 47 ACCOUNT ALLCLR NONE ALL CLEAR AUTH NONE AUTHORIZATION CODE BARGE NONE BARGE IN BILL NONE BILL Hotel Feature BLOCK NONE OHVA BLOCK BOSS NONE BOSS SECRETARY CAMP 45 STATION CAMP ON CANMG 42 MESSAGE CANCEL CBK 44 CALLBACK CHIN NONE CHECK IN Hotel Feature CHOUT NONE CHECK OUT Hotel Feature CHOICE NONE CHOICE Related to News Server CONF 46 CONFERENCE CONP NONE CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY CR NONE CALL RECORD Requires SVMi card CREDIT NONE CREDIT Hotel Feature DGPALM NONE EASY ALARM SET TO REMOTE STATION DICT NONE DICTATION DIR NONE DIRECTORY DIRPK 65 DIRECT PICKUP DISALM 58 DISA ALARM CLEAR DIVERT NONE EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT TO SECRETARY DLOCK 13 DOOR UNLOCK DND 40 DO NOT DISTURB DNDO NONE DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE E LCR1 NONE SECOND LCR DIGI
221. ee dead Eee d edel 2 18 110 STATION ON OFF idu etait ire RE Ie Ett be detis 2 20 111 PHONE RING 2 23 112 ALARM REMINDER 2 24 113 VIEW MEMO NUMBER 2 26 114 PHONE VOLUME 2 27 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE 2 29 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE edet cdidit ide dec dede dente dete een 2 30 41 7 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE tne pains 2 32 118 CONFERENCE GROUP 2 33 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY ieee eed ite e db de eae vetoes 2 35 120 LARGE LCD 2 36 121 PHONE LANGUAGE 2 38 122 NEWS DISPLAY SPEED en netten nnn nri nnns 2 40 125 EXECUTIVE STAT Ecc iet n etre eec e de PR e Erde E e 2 41 199 SHOW LICENSE STATUS 5 eta nie m ts 2 43 200 OPEN CUSTOMER ennt nnne 2 44 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER sse ener trennen 2 45 202 CHANGE FEATURE sse ener ennt trennen nnne 2 46 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE entier ire dst erat deed 2 48 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL
222. efore recalling the operator AUTO REDIAL INT 30 1 250 SEC This timer controls the time between attempts after RETRY dialling is set on a station AUTO REDIAL RLS 45 1 250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a Ring No Answer condition on a retry number dialled before the auto redial is automatically can celled BOOTH TIME OUT 005 0 250 MIN Controls the time for which a booth phone is Hotel application only enabled CALLBACK NO ANS 30 1 250 SEC This timer controls the time before the call back is automatically cancelled when a call back detects Ring No Answer CAMP ON RECALL 30 0 250 SEC This timer controls the time a camped on call will stay at a destination before recalling to the transferring station CID MSG RECEIVE 6 1 25 SEC The amount of time that the system will allow a valid message from the analogue CID trunk CLI DISPLAY TIME 5 1 25 SEC The amount of time that the Caller ID informa tion remains on the phone s display CO CLEAR TIME 30 0 250 SEC The length of time a Direct Trunk Select key remains busy after cleardown Samsung Business Communications 2 141 CHAPTER 2 2 142 continued Timer Name Default Range Unit Description CO CONFIRM TIME 3 0 250 MIN According to MMC 314 CO CONFIRM type the outgoing call will be disconnected after this timer expires or th
223. el Programming list 1 14 Table 1 9 Alphabetically arranged Programming 1 16 Table 1 10 Phone Function Programming mn 1 23 Table 1 11 Networking Function Programming list 1 24 Table 1 12 VoIP Function Programming list 1 24 Table 1 13 WLAN Function Programming list ese m 1 25 Table 1 14 LCR Function Programming list enn 1 25 Table 1 15 Auto Attendant Voice Mail Function Programming 1 26 Table 1 16 Diagnosis Function Programming list eese 1 27 Table 1 17 Hotel Function Programming list eeeeeenn mn 1 27 XIV SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide CHAPTER 1 Overview of MMC Pro gramming In this chapter the things to know before you start MMC programming and the phone but tons and cautions will be discussed 1 1 Introduction to Programming The MMC means the changes on the data that is used for the system operation program The MMC can be divided into programmable one and non programmable one The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels such as technician operator and sta tion level The technician level programming and the operator level programming require a passcode for each level and the station level programming does not require a passc
224. ell contacts or Ring over Page relays 1 VMAA Used to group a number of voice mail port extensions These must have been defined in MMC 207 as VMAA ports or they cannot be entered here 2 UCD Used to build a UCD group The system will support two methods of UCD TYPE 1 UCD The group OVERFLOW N ANS destination see below is defined as an SLT port to which you must connect some type of announcement device to play to callers while they are on hold Please note that this type of UCD group has the following limitations a The announcement device must be able to terminate the an nouncement with a hook flash and a transfer back to the UCD group b Only one caller at a time can hear the announcement c Each caller connected to the announcement must hear the an nouncement in its entirety d Itis possible that a new caller may jump ahead in the queue if a previous caller is currently connected to the announcement de vice TYPE 2 UCD The group OVERFLOW N ANS destination see below is defined as an AA port or group This will only work if an AA card has been in stalled in the system The digital announcer in the AA card will supply two recorded an nouncements to callers in queue The first announcement is played only once the second announcement will repeat for as long as the caller is in queue This type of UCD group has the following advantages a No external device need be installed to provide an announce ment
225. er Enter table number 00 62 via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter entry number 00 15 via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter IP address via dial keypad Cursor will be return step 3 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC entry RELATED ITEMS DISPLAY TB 00 ENTRY 00 OF 00 TB 00 ENTRY 00 Oo Os Oo 00 ENTRY 00 TB 00 ENTRY 00 165 218 987 110 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE MMC 834 H 323 OPTIONS MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 834 H 323 OPTIONS This MMC provides various VoIP support options The options set in this MMC apply sys tem wide No Parameter Description Default 00 GATEWAY CALL ID Numeric identifier for system up to 12 digits 1234 01 H 323 FAST SETUP Enables or disables the H 323 Fast Start call setup method ENABLE 02 CALLER ID TYPE This option controls the calling party identification type There are 3 possible selections 0 GWID shows the gateway call ID 1 ANI shows the calling station number 2 IP shows the calling H 323 gateway IP ad dress ANI 06 TUNNELING Enables or d
226. er Programming Guide 425 CID TRUNKS This MMC assigns a TRUNK number to a CID TRUNK CONDITIONS This function can be used only when the TRM or trunk card is installed in the system DEFAULT DATA NORMAL TRUNK ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 425 701 CID TRUNKS Display shows first terminal number NORMAL TRUNK 2 Enter trunk number 702 CID TRUNKS OR NORMAL TRUNK Press Volume button to make selection of trunk num bers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor OR ALL CID TRUNKS Select all NORMAL TRUNK 3 Enter trunk type e g CID TRUNK ALL CID TRUNKS OR CID TRUNK Press Volume button to select option and Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS Samsung Business Communications 2 129 CHAPTER 2 426 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL Allows loss levels to be adjusted on a per trunk basis There are two adjustments available in this MMC TX is the transmission level adjustment of the trunk to the station RX is the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk There are four types of adjustment No Trunk Gain Description 0 0 0 No adjustment 1 1 9 Up 1 9 dB 2 6 0 Down 6 0 dB 3 2 5 Down 2 5 dB DEFAULT DATA TX 0 0 RX 0 0 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 426
227. er an Account code which is not verified User can enter any code up to 12 digits including and NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 305 201 FORCD CODE Display shows NONE 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 FORCD CODE OR NONE Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial a feature option 0 3 e g 2 205 FORCD CODE OR ACCT VERIFIED Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 707 MMC 708 Samsung Business Communications AUTHORIZATION CODE ACCOUNT CODE 2 79 CHAPTER 2 306 LINE OFF HOOK SELECTION Allows a station to make a predetermined call similar to a ring down circuit upon the ex piration of a timer see MMC 502 STATION TIMERS Off Hook Selection Timer CONDITIONS The hotline destination can be a station a station group a trunk a trunk group or an external number There is a maximum of 18 digits in the dial string for external numbers The access code for trunk or trunk group access e g 0 or 9 is not counted as part of the 18 DEFAULT DATA NONE PROGRAM BUTTONS B Used to insert a flash code F Used to insert a pause code P D Used to insert a
228. er authorization codes will CODE print on SMDR If this option is set to NO is printed on SMDR 05 SMDR START YES This option determines whether valid calls will include TIME the minimum call time in total call duration 06 IN OUT GROUP NO This option allows a message IN GROUP or OUT GROUP to be printed in the digits dialled column each time a station enters or leaves a group 07 DND CALL NO This option allows a message IN DND or OUT DND to be printed in the digits dialled column each time a sta tion enters or leaves DND 08 WAKE UP CALL YES This option determines whether stations receiving an alarm reminder call will print on SMDR 09 DIRECTORY NONE This option allows the system administrator to enter a NAME name up to 16 characters which will appear on the SMDR header 10 CALLERID DATA NO This option can be selected to print Caller ID data re ceived from the Central Office on incoming calls This option requires the use of a 132 column wide carriage printer or an 80 column printer set for condensed print 11 ABANDON CALL NO If this option is set to YES unanswered calls for which CID information was received will print on SMDR 13 NO OF DIAL 0 If this option is set to a numeric value the selected last MASK digits of the number dialled field will be masked as as 2 236 terisks on the SMDR print out Maximum masked digits is 18 First 4 digits will not mask Samsung Business Co
229. ess Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 851 SYS ALARM REPORT Display shows VIEW ALARMS 2 Enter desired option SYS ALARM REPORT OR VIEW ALARMS Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 System displays the alarm count number date and 00 02 18 14 30 time stamp MNF02 C1 S02 Alarm type and cause code will display 4 Press Volume button to scroll through other alarms SYS ALARM REPORT OR VIEW ALARMS Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS Samsung Business Communications 2 337 CHAPTER 2 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS This MMC allows the assignment of system alarms to ring and display on stations that have an Alarm key assigned The Alarm key is assigned in MMC 722 Station Key Pro gramming Alarm key programming is tenant wide tenants 1 and 2 Alarms not pro grammed to report to the system Alarm key will still be retained in the maintenance alarm buffer for Alarm Reporting MMC 851 The alarm buffer holds up to 100 alarms on a First In First Out FIFO basis Pressing the Alarm key will silence the audible alarm until an other alarm is generated by the system Alarm conditions that h
230. essage 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications 2 29 CHAPTER 2 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock appointment reminder feature for any station Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may be defined as a one time or TODAY alarm or as a DAILY alarm The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time It is also possible to set a message to display when the alarm is sounded No Type Description 0 NOTSET No alarm 1 TODAY Alarm once only 2 DAILY Alarm daily at set time ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME DEFAULT DATA ALARMS ARE NOTSET ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 116 201 ALM REM 1 Display shows HHMM gt NOTSET 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 ALM 1 OR HHMM gt NOTSET Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL ALM REM 1 Select all stations HHMM gt NOTSET 3 Dial 1 3 to select alarm e g 2 205 ALM REM 2 OR HHMM gt
231. f 950 entries are allowed the bin numbers are 050 999 DEFAULT DATA NONE PROGRAM BUTTONS B Used to insert a flash code F C Used to insert a pause code P D Used to insert a pulse tone conversion code E Used to mask unmask following digits shows as P or T F Used to enter name for speed dial bin see MMC 706 ANS RLS Used to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation tableeMMC 728 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 705 SYS SPEED DIAL Display shows 500 2 Dial speed index desired e g 505 SYS SPEED DIAL OR 5058 _ Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter access code e g 9 plus the phone SYS SPEED DIAL number up to 24 digits digits will scroll under 505 9 121223456789 and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press F key to toggle to MMC 706 step 3 to enter SYS SPEED NAME 2 200 name S053 _ Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 5 If you want to save the speed dial number and name SvS SPEED DIAL to the CID translation table MMC 728 ADD CLI XLT NO Press the ANS RLS button and dial 1 for YES The speed dial name must exist 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY
232. for NORMAL PRS 2 OR Press Volume button to scroll through options and use Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC503 TRUNK WIDE TIMERS 2 114 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 415 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA Allows the system administrator or technician to enable or disable the reporting of aban doned Trunk Line calls for which CLIP information has been collected on a per trunk basis There are two options for this MMC No Option Description 0 REPORT NO Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will not be printed on SMDR or stored in the system call abandon list These records will continue to be stored in the station review list 1 REPORT YES Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will be printed on SMDR and stored in the system call abandon list These re cords will also be stored in the station review list DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS REPORT YES ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 415 701 TRK ABNDN Display shows REPORT YES 2 Dial trunk number e g 705 705 TRK ABNDN OR REPORT YES Use Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO 705 TRK ABNDN OR REPORT NO Use Volume butto
233. for pre pay phone deposits 02 88 User Assignable code 89 W UP SET A wake up call was set 90 W UP ANS A wake up call was answered 91 W UP N ANS A wake up call was not answered 92 W UP CANCL A wake up call was cancelled 93 Check In A guest has checked into a room 94 Check out A guest has checked out of a room 95 Available A room has been flagged as AVAILABLE 96 Occupied A room has been flagged as OCCUPIED 97 Clean Room A room has been flagged as NEEDS CLEANING 98 Fix Room A room has been flagged as NEED MAINTENANCE 99 Hold A room has been flagged as HOLD CONDITIONS This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME DEFAULT DATA NO ENTRIES Samsung Business Communications 2 259 CHAPTER 2 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 760 ITEM CODE 00 Display shows NAME RM Deposit 2 Enter valid code number e g 02 via dial ITEM CODE 02 keypad Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter item name e g ROOM COST via ITEM CODE 02 keypad NAME ROOM COST 4 Press Right Soft button to move cursor to tax ITEM CODE 02 entries TAXES 00000000 5 Enter the tax rates that apply to this item 1 selects ITEM CODE 02
234. fore has greater traffic handling capabilities When the group overflow timer in MMC 601 expires the caller will be routed to the AA card It is here that the caller is played the UCD FIRST MESSAGE and SECOND MESSAGE while in queue This will continue until an agent becomes free or the caller is transferred to a final destination The following program options apply No Option Description 00 01 02 FIRST MESSAGE SECOND MESSAGE EXIT CODE After the caller has overflowed from the UCD group the first message will immediately play This message will only be played once for the caller If no agent has become free after the UCD recall time see UCD Recall Time the caller will be played the second message This message will be repeated for as long as the caller is in queue at an interval specified in the UCD Recall timer below While the caller is hearing a message but not during MOH the caller may dial the DTMF digit specified here and be trans ferred immediately to the final destination see Final Destination The exit code is optional and does not need to be used If used the first and second messages may be modified to provide in structions on its use 03 RETRY COUNT Samsung Business Communications The UCD program is designed to route a caller to a final destina tion after a programmable number of loops through the UCD message The range of this counter is 0 to 99 00
235. g Guide RELATED ITEMS MMC 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE Samsung Business Communications 2 25 CHAPTER 2 113 Allows a station user the ability to view a memo left by the user memo can be left by en tering it via the dial keypad using the table below A memo of up to and including 13 char acters can be entered ENTER CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 113 201 VIEW MEMO Display shows 1 2 Dial keyset number e g 205 205 VIEW MEMO OR 15 Press VOLUME keys to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Dial memo 1 3 205 VIEW MEMO OR ee Press VOLUME keys to select and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Enter memo via dial keypad 205 VIEW MEMO 1 CALL TOM 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 26 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 114 PHONE VOLUME Allows the station user or system administrator to set the ring volume off hook ring vol ume handset receive volume speaker volume background music volume and page volume for any or all phones No Type Description 0 RING V
236. ge is 00 16 2 307 CHAPTER 2 continued No Parameter Description Default 13 DTMF TYPE There are two types of DTMF transmission INBAND OUTBAND which is industry standard H 245 type DTMF transport and OUTBAND which is a Samsung proprietary method 14 TOS FIELD An 8 bit binary value that will be used by external All bits 0 routers switches etc that optionally support TOS bit prioritization to identify the transport priority value of data packets generated by the MGI card This value can be left at the default value 00000 if your network infra structure does not support this method of bandwidth management 15 FAX RETRY This option selects retry count of Fax over IP if errors 3 are detected The range is 0 4 0 means no retry 16 RTP CHK TM This option selects the interval time for sending RTCP 5 SEC 17 USE T38 711 If use T38 FAX specifies 711 Codec use Enable 18 802 1 VLAN Set value 0000 4095 0000 19 802 1 PRIOR Set value 0 7 0 20 802 1Q Enable or disable for 802 1Q DISABLE including 802 1 VLAN and 802 1 PRIOR 21 EC Set EC gain value 18 38 32 22 Set NLP value 0 2 0 23 EC TAIL LEN Set EC TAIL LEN 8 128 064 MS 24 JITPEROID Set JITTER PERIOD 1 10 01 25 JITDELTM Set JITTER DELETE TIME 0 500 250 DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 835
237. ght Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter MGI user dial number 3801 MGI USER OR NONE Press Volume button to select an MGI user and press Right Soft button to store and move cursor 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 190 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 700 COPY COS CONTENTS This MMC allows the technician to duplicate classes of service DEFAULT DATA NONE PROGRAM BUTTONS F KEY Used to advance to MMC 701 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 700 COPY COS ITEMS Display shows COS01 COS01 2 Dial selected COS to copy e g 05 COPY COS ITEMS OR COS05 COS01 Press Volume button to select COS and press Right Soft button to move cursor and advance to next step 3 Dial target COS e g 06 COPY COS ITEMS OR COS05 COS06 Press Volume button to select COS and press Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2 4 Press F key to advance MMC 701 and press COS CONTENTS 06 Right Soft to advance cursor TOLL LEVEL A 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Samsung Business Communications 2 191 CHAPTER 2 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Similar to MMC 700 but does not allow a copy command This MMC i
238. h octet field Example 192 168 1 10 input must be 192 168 001 010 DEFAULT DATA TABLE 80 165 213 255 255 ALL OTHERS 0 0 0 0 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 838 PRIVATE IP 01 Display shows the first table number 0 GO O 0 2 Enter table number 01 80 via dial keypad PRIVATE IP 01 OR Oo Press Volume button to make selection press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter IP address via dial keypad PRIVATE IP 01 Cursor will return to step 3 165 213 97 13 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC entry RELATED ITEMS MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE MMC 834 H 323 OPTIONS MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications 2 317 CHAPTER 2 840 IP PHONE INFORMATION This MMC provides a means to register IP phones with the OfficeServ 7100 system Dur 2 318 ing registration the IP and MAC addresses are also registered The User ID and Password must match the table entry in this MMC for the IP phone to be registered The system de fault phone numbers are 3201 3299 and default User IDs match the default station num bers The system default password is 1234 IP phones must be individually programmed with a User ID and Password in order to register with the system No Option Description Default 00 USER ID T
239. here is a maximum of 10 entries available each of which may be up to four digits long TOLL OVERRIDE This table of eight entries is used to identify the numbers that will bypass all dialling restrictions This bypass includes toll re striction trunk access and forced authorization or account codes Each entry in the table can be up to 14 digits long DEFAULT OVRD USE TRK GRP DATA NONE ACTION 1 2 3 Press Transfer button and enter 709 PBX ACCESS CODE Display shows Select PBX SPECIAL CODE TOLL OVERRIDE TOLL OVERRIDE This entry designates the trunk group that toll override calls will access DISPLAY de or OVRD USE TRK GRE ile OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter index number e g 3 TOLL OVERRIDE OR ER Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Samsung Business Communications 2 205 CHAPTER 2 4 Enter via dial keypad the desired access feature TOLL OVERRIDE code e g 911 Press Right Soft button to enter and return to step 3 and enter more entries 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 401 TRUNK LINE PBX LINE MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE
240. his is the ID the IP phone must match to register with the OfficeServ 7100 system alphanumeric First 99 IP phones are 3201 3299 others are EMPTY 01 USER PSWD This is the password the IP phone must have to reg ister with the OfficeServ 7100 system alphanumeric 1234 02 IP ADDR This is the IP address of the IP phone when regis tered with the system Read only 0 0 0 0 03 MAC ADDR This is MAC address of the IP phone when regis tered with the system Read only FFFFFFFFFFFF 04 SIG PORT This is the IP UDP port of the IP phone when regis tered with the system Read only This information will be needed when traversing NAT routers fire walls etc 6000 05 VOICE PORT This is the IP RTP port of the IP phone when regis tered with the system Read only This information will be needed when traversing NAT routers fire walls etc 9000 06 IP TYPE This is the type of IP network used PRIVATE or PUBLIC PRIVATE 07 DSP TYPE This selects which CODEC this phone s DSP will use G 729A low bandwidth or G 711 high bandwidth This data uses IP phone to IP phone connection only others follow MGI CODEC type G 729A 08 PHONE TYPE This is the type of IP phone used SAMSUNG or SIP future Use SAMSUNG SAMSUNG 09 10 REGIST CLR FRAME COUNT This is used to clear the registration of a particular IP phone This is
241. hone to simply change the system setup Likewise using a phone to change the system setup is called MMC Man Machine Com munication program This guide describes how to program a digital phone Audience This guide is intended for users who program the MMC of the OfficeServ 7100 system Guide Contents This guide is composed of two Chapters and Abbreviation Each chapter is introduced as follows CHAPTER 1 Overview of MMC Programming This chapter describes things to know before starting MMC programming and about the buttons of digital phone and cautions CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming This chapter describes in detail how to use each MMC program MMCs are listed in nu merical order ABBREVIATION Acronyms frequently used in this document are described Samsung Business Communications Conventions The following types of paragraphs contain special information that must be carefully read and thoroughly understood Such information may or may not be enclosed in a rectangular box separating it from the main text but is always preceded by an icon and or a bold title WARNING Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid WARNING personal injury or fatality CAUTION Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid CAUTION a service failure or damage to the system Va CHECKPOINT P
242. ication Part Transmission Control Protocol T1E1PRI Trunk User Agent User Agent Client Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter User Agent Server Uniform Call Distribution User Datagram Protocol Uninterruptible Power System Universal Serial Bus Voice Dial Virtual LAN Voice over Internet Protocol Voice Processing Module Virtual Private Network VI W WAN WBS WIM WLI xDSL Wide Area Network Wireless Base Station WAN Interface Module Wireless LAN Interface x Digital Subscriber Line Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 2007 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved Information in this giude is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd No information contained here may be copied translated tran scribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written con sent of SAMSUNG Information in this guide is subject to change without notice 7 ELECTRONICS
243. ications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE The LCR ROUTE TABLE is responsible for selecting a specific trunk group in the comple tion of an outward bound call This table works in conjunction with LCR DIGIT TABLE LCR TIME TABLE LCR COS TABLE and LCR MODIFIED DIGITS TABLE After you dial a valid digit string the system uses the LCR ROUTE TABLE to select a specific pre determined trunk group There is a maximum of 99 routes available If more than one trunk group is available for call completion the system uses the first des ignated trunk group and then the succeeding trunk groups If all trunk groups are busy selected route call queue becomes active and allocates trunks as they become available DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 Press Transfer button and enter 712 Display shows Dial LCR ROUTE table number e g 05 OR Press Volume button to selected table and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial TIME BAND index number 1 4 e g 2 OR Press Volume button to selected index and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial LCR COS number 1 8 e g 4 OR Press Volume button to selected COS and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial TRUNK GROUP access code e g 801 OR Press Volume button to selected access code and press Right Soft button to move cursor Samsung Business Communications LCR LCR eal LCR LCR A
244. igned to control the loud bell not a station group DEFAULT DATA UNASSIGNED ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 205 3901 LOUD BELL Display shows current setting RING PAIR NONE 2 Dial loud bell number e g 3902 3902 LOUD BELL OR RING PAIR NONE Use Volume button to scroll through loud bell num bers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Enter station number e g 201 3902 LOUD BELL OR RING PAIR 201 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 50 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 206 BARGE IN TYPE Sets the type of barge in that is permitted No Type Description 0 NO BARGE IN Barge in feature is unavailable regardless of a station s barge in status 1 WITH TONE Barge in will have an intrusion tone and display at the station barged in on 2 WITHOUT TONE Barge in is allowed There is no barge in tone or display at the station barged in on and the barging in station will be muted DEFAULT DATA NO BARGE IN ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 206 BARGE IN TYPE Display shows NO BARGE IN 2 Dial 0 2 to select barge in type e g 2 BARGE IN TYPE OR WITHOUT TONE Press Volume button to select barge in type and
245. ill be auto matically added to the room bill when the first Check Out Time is reached For example if you set the Check In End time as 5 am all rooms checked in before 5 am will be automatically charged an extra day the Check Out Time which might be say 11 am Rooms checked in after 5 am will not be charged extra until the next day if still occupied at the Check Out Time CONDITIONS This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY Press Transfer button and enter 513 CHECK OUT TIME Display shows HH MM 2 Select the timer using the Volume buttons ROOM CLEAN TIME HMM OS 3 Enter new time using 24 hour clock format ROOM CLEAN TIME system returns to step 2 HH MM 11 30 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 163 CHAPTER 2 514 SOURCE This program can assign an external tone source e g a music source instead of the normal system tone TONE for certain calls The tones that can be changed are No Type 0 BUSY TONE 1 DIAL TONE 2 DND TONE 3 TRANSFER TONE 4 MSG WAIT TONE 5 ERROR TONE 6 RINGBACK TONE DEFAULT DATA TONE ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 514
246. ing plan downloading procedure The virtual port type are followed No Type Description 0 VIRTUAL EXT Virtual extension number 1 DESKTOP ITP DESKTOP IP based phone number 2 DECT PHONE DECT terminal number 3 MOBILE ITP Wireless IP based mobile phone num ber 4 BRI STATION ISDN terminal number 5 VOIP NET TRK VoIP networking trunk number 6 VOIP 323 TRK VoIP H 323 trunk number 7 VOIP SIP TRK VoIP SIP trunk number 8 REMOTE STN Remote station number via networking Select VMS Type There are 3 types SVMi CARD DLI CON NECT IP UMS SERVER impossible simultaneously use all type Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 750 Display shows 2 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY MBX DOWNLOAD NO VM RESTART RESET NOW NO RESTART RESET NOW YES 2 247 CHAPTER 2 751 ASSIGN MAILBOX This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built In Voice Mail card It assigns mailboxes to each station or group as required During Voice Mail card power up mailboxes will b
247. ings and vice versa Features can be set or cancelled at either station When changing the COS If the COS is changed for either station in MMC 301 the change affects NOTE both stations Messages from the secondary extension will display the secondary extension number DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 740 201 PRIMARY Display shows SECONDARY NONE 2 Enter the primary station number via dial 201 PRIMARY Keypad e g 201 SECONDARY NONE OR Use Volume button to select and press Right Soft button 3 Enter the secondary station number via dial 201 PRIMARY Keypad e g 205 SECONDARY 205 OR Use Volume button to select and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 102 CALL FORWARD MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE Samsung Business Communications 2 241 CHAPTER 2 746 COSTING DIAL PLAN The COSTING DIAL PLAN is used to analyze the leading dialled digits of a dialled num ber and determine what DIAL PLAN it is to follow Data entry for this program is in three fields ENTRY DIGITS and COST RATE table reference DIGITS Up to 500 entries may be made Each entry can be up to 10 digits These are the entries that will be searched to find a match with the digits dialled by the station
248. ion 03 gt 2 Enter station number e g 205 205 CALL SPEED OR 03 gt Press Volume button to scroll through stations and press Right Soft button to select a station OR Select all stations 3 Dial speed option 03 10 205 CALL SPEED 032304 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 40 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 125 EXECUTIVE STATE Allows the system administrator or technician to set an executive station s options as fol lows Option Description 0 EXEC STATE When working with EASYSET the state of the executive station can be displayed e g INA MEETING 1 STATE IN If EXEC STATE set to OTHERS IN EASYSET displays this message 2 STATE OUT If EXEC STATE set to OTHERS OUT EASYSET displays this mes sage 3 ANSWER MODE Set answer mode for executive secretary calling Ring Auto Answer Voice Announce Refer to MMC 103 for a description of answer modes ENTER CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 125 201 EXEC STATE Display shows IN THE ROOM 2 Dial executive station number e g 205 205 EXEC STATE OR IN THE ROOM Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to mov
249. ire less 131 access Available in UK only 2 143 CHAPTER 2 continued Timer Name Default Range Unit Description MS LED ON TIME 5 1 10 SEC This timer controls the duration a Manual Sig nalling key will remain on after use OFF HOOK RING INT 15 1 250 SEC This timer controls the time between ring bursts to a user who has camped on call OHVA ANSWER TIME 10 1 250 SEC This timer controls the time allowed to answer an OHVA call before automatic rejection PAGE TIME OUT 20 1 250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a page an nouncement PAGE TONE TIME 500 100 2500 This timer controls the duration of tone burst MSEC heard over the page prior to the page an nouncement PARK RECALL TIME 45 0 250 SEC This timer controls how long a call is parked before recalling to the call park originator AP MMC LOCK TIME 5 1 60 MIN This timer monitors the PCMMC activity drops the link if no action is created by PCMMC and returns the system back to se cure program status PERI UCD REPORT 5 3 99 SEC This timer determines the interval between periodic UCD reports provided to an SIO port POWER DOWN TIME 2000 500 9900 This timer monitors the power to the ROM MSEC pack to begin shutdown status RECALL 2 1 250 MIN This is the time an attendant recall will ring DISCONNECT before being disconnected RECALL WAIT TIME 15 0 250 SEC This is the time a
250. is a system wide password used 1234 for registration of IP phones 03 EASYSET OPTION Sets EasySet link via LAN option with the system 0 PSWD This is a system wide password used 1234 for authentication of EasySet server 1 ALIVE This is an EasySet link via LAN alive 0 SEC check timer Samsung Business Communications 2 321 CHAPTER 2 04 Option CTI LINK OPTION Description Sets CTI link via LAN option with the system continued Default 0 SMDR REPORT Sets YES or NO for SMDR data to CTI link via LAN NO 1 REPORT Sets YES or NO for UCD data to CTI link via LAN NO 2 ALIVE This is a CTI link via LAN alive check timer If this is set to 0 the system will not check link alive 300 SEC 05 ITP DSP PARA Sets IP phone DSP parameter system wide 0 M FRAME This value determines the trans mission interval time of VoIP packets generated by the IP phone This data uses DOWN SYS DATA only see 3 below The range is 10 40 ms 10 ms 1 JITTER Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment This data uses DOWN SYS DATA only see 3 below The range is 10 90 ms 20 ms 2 TOS An 8 bit binary value that will be used by external routers switches etc that optionally support TOS bit prioritization to identify the transport priority value of data packets gener
251. is required in an OfficeServ 7100 system with an MCP card you must con nect the LAN cable to the MCP card and be connected to a terminal supporting the TCP IP function DEFAULT DATA AUTO PRINT OFF 2 62 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 Press Transfer button and enter 217 Display shows Dial 0 for manual or 1 for automatic print OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button If AUTO selected dial 0 1 2 or 3 for automatic print option OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button Enter daily report time HHMM Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 829 Samsung Business Communications LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS DISPLAY IVAN IEC RUE ORAL MANUAL PRINTOUT TRAFFIC REPOR AUTO PRINT IRV IC 2 e TRAFFIC REPORT DAILY HHMM 2200 CHAPTER 2 219 RELAY TYPE Assigns the service type of three relay ports of misc card Common bell loud bell NOT USED DEFAULT DATA External Page ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 219 Display shows 2 Enter the station number OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button 3 Select service type 0 3
252. isables the need for additional chan nels using H 245 signalling Tunneling allows use of the H 245 signal channel with the Q 931 chan nel ENABLE 07 DEFAULT DIL NO This allows programming of the default direct in line number when digits are missing or incorrect on an inbound call 500 11 14 CODEC AUTO NEGO SIGNAL PORT Enables or disables Auto CODEC Negotiation when the MGI is used as an H 323 gateway Indicate the port number for H 323 signalling and sets a range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment The common and default IP path or port used is 10000 ON 10000 17 SEND CLIP TABLE Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER MMC 323 which provides calling party identification when using the as a H 323 gateway This provides station ID of the calling station A single digit value corre sponding with the desired table in MMC 323 should be entered here This is only used when MMC 405 value is null 18 INCOMING MODE This option selects how incoming calls are routed when the is used as a H 323 gateway 0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING Follows MMC 406 1 FOLLOW DID TRANS Follows MMC 714 2 FOLLOW INCOM Follows MMC 724 FOLLOW DID TRANS 19 ALLOW GW CHECK When using a gatekeeper this permits the H 323 gateway to check for gatekeeper presence DISABLE 20 21 CLIR WITH NUMBER USE OVERLAP DIAL Samsung Business Communications When this option is enabled
253. k by press ing the trunk key When this option is set to ON a trunk that is pro grammed to ring a specific station a private line or DIL will ring at that station if the station is in DND TRUNK FORWARD ON When this option is set to OFF this trunk will not follow a ringing stations call forwarding LCR ALLOW OFF Allows LCR to be switched ON OFF when a trunk is accessed using a DT key or by dialling its port number e g 701 EFWD EXT CLI ON This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be sent to the external forwarded outgoing call Station or Received CLI from Trunk REPEAT CLI ON This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be sent to the trunk to trunk call Trunk or Received CLI from Trunk TONECHK DISC OFF When this option is set to ON loop trunk can be discon nected by detecting busy tone To use this feature the LP TRK TONE DISC option in MMC 861 must be set to ENABLE 10 AUTO ANSWER COLORRING AS DEFAULT DATA 1A2 EMULATE OFF TRK INC DND OFF TRK FORWARD ON EFWD EXT CLI ON REPEAT CLI ON TONECHK DISC OFF AUTO ANSWER OFF COLORRING AS OFF 2 98 OFF OFF When this option is set to ON Auto Answer mode can be assigned on a per trunk basis When this options is set to ON coloring service can be used by svmi message Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION 1
254. k rings that keyset There is also a cadence control option to perform a similar function for SLTs There are eight ring tones available along with a Follow Station option default for keysets There are five cadences and a Follow Station option default for SLTs See table below It also allows the technician to assign the call priority for a group call when called by a specific station or when a specific trunk rings that phone When calls come into a station group and all group members are busy the system will assign a priority to a specific station or a specific trunk so that high priority calls will be placed at the front of the group queue If this option is set to NO the call held longest in the group queue has the highest priority There are nine priority levels level 1 is the highest and level 9 is the lowest Option No Description TONE Calls will ring with the keyset user s choice of ring frequency Option 1 8 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with this frequency CADENCE Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences Option 1 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the intercom ring ca dence 2 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the CO ring cadence 3 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the DOOR ring ca dence 4 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the ALARM ring ca dence 5 Calls from the progr
255. l Server Programming Guide CHAPTER 2 MMC Programming This chapter describes how to use each MMC program as it was listed 2 1 Overview of Programming Procedure The order of programming will be discussed before explaining programming method of each list Please read the description carefully before programming The programming order is as follows 1 Make the programmable state Press the Transfer button at pause Enter the program number either 200 or 800 Enter either the operator passcode or the technician passcode Press 1 dial button to enable the programming mode In case of Program 800 Technician Program Mode Setting enter the tenant number to be programmed 2 Make the program number selectable state If the Speaker button is pressed the program selection mode appears Or if the Transfer button is pressed the programming state ends and the pause state begin 3 Select a program Enter the program number Or select the program number with the Volume button and press the Speaker button Or Press Transfer button in a pause state and enter the program number 4 Start programming the corresponding program Samsung Business Communications 2 1 CHAPTER 2 2 2 Programming Procedure This section describes a procedure of each program Refer to the programming procedure corresponding to the MMC 100 STATION LOCK Allows the system a
256. l access to all features allowed on this trunk 01 LCR ENABLE OFF This option determines whether the system will or will not route outgoing calls based on the information in the LCR routing tables 03 PERI UCD RPT OFF Periodic UCD Information provider Enables UCD Statistics data on a per UCD group basis to print out on the IO port which has been set as PERI UCD in real time every 3 99 seconds This allows the information to be interfaced and manipulated by an external package or third party provided software 04 CID CODE INS OFF When ON the system will insert the country code when re ceiving CID information This feature can use the CID display callback feature 05 DISA MOH OFF When ON outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of dial tone from the time the system answers a DISA trunk until the caller dials a digit 06 TRANSFER MOH OFF When ON outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of ringback tone from the time a transfer is completed until the call is answered by an internal party 08 09 DID BSY ROUT ALARM MOH OFF ON When ON a DID call directed to a busy station will re route to the destination in MMC 406 for that trunk if CW is set to OFF in MMC 714 If the CW option is set to ON the call will camp on When OFF and the CW option is set to OFF the call will re route to the operator When ON a station user answering an alarm ring will hear
257. l calls incoming and outgoing can be recorded In this MMC you can assign e Station number Which station can use this feature e Mailbox number What mailbox the conversations are recorded in LOorB What type of calls are recorded in out or both e Voice mail port number What port is dedicated to the station Before using the Auto Record feature Before using the Auto Record feature make sure that you are not violating any WARNING laws Samsung is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature CONDITIONS A maximum of eight stations can use this feature at one time The same port cannot be as signed to more than one station Attempts to do this will result in an error message When a Voice Mail port is assigned here it is automatically removed from the Voice Mail group de fined in MMC 601 DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 752 AUTO RECORD Display shows STN 201 MB NONE 2 Dialstation number via dial keypad AUTO RECORD OR STN 201 MB NONE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial mailbox number via dial keypad AUTO RECORD OR STN 201 MB 201 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Samsung Business Communications 2 249 CHAPTER 2 4 Dial VM number via dial keypad AUTO RECORD OR PORT 209 CALL I Press Vo
258. lect WIP REGIST CLEAR to clear the registration WIP REGIST CLE AR status for a terminal 3301 FORCED Select the WEP KEY setting when ENCRYPTION WBS WEP SERVICE is selected DISABLE Samsung Business Communications 2 333 CHAPTER 2 6 Enter WEP KEY values when the WBS WEP SER WEP KEY VICE is enabled 13 characters only 7 Select ENABLE to use the static WBS IP STATIC WBS IP DISABLE 8 Select ENABLE to use the static WIP IP STATIC WIP IP DISABLE 9 Select AP TYPE of the system If you change the AP SELECT AP TYPE type the system must be restarted COMBO AP SIGE Je RESET SYSTEM NO RELATED ITEMS MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION MMC 848 WLAN IP MAC LIST 2 334 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 850 SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY This MMC is used for system resource display used and free resources This is a READ ONLY MMC 0 DTMFR DSP S 1 CID DSP S 2 R2MFC DSP S 3 CONF GROUP S DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 850 DTMFR DSP S Display shows USE 000 FREE 008 2 Enter the option number 0 3 SES OR USE 000 FREE 008 Press Volume button to select 3 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button advance to next MMC RELATE
259. lect and press Right Soft button 3 Dial fax station number e g 301 205 FAX PAIR OR 301 Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 221 EXTENSION TYPE MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION 2 68 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 224 WAKE UP ANNOUNCEMENT This MMC is an enhanced Wake Up feature The system will play a recorded message when a Wake Up call is answered by the user The Wake Up Announcement feature re quires an SVMi 20 card to be installed in the system When a Wake Up call is answered the system will access the customized Wake Up message 1 48 recorded in the card The end user can record this message and also change it if desired The Wake Up message will have no default ROM message assigned to it however a ROM message 49 64 may also be assigned as the Wake Up message if desired This MMC has three options No Option Description 0 AA GROUP Determines which AA group will be connected when a Wake Up call is answered This destination can be any AA group 1 MESSAGE NO Determines which message will be played when a Wake Up call is answered This destination can be a custom recorded message 1 48 or one of the pre programmed messages 49 64 2 GROUP BUSY CONDITIONS NONE DEFAULT DATA AA GROUP NONE MESSAGE NO
260. les but more than one digit can be assigned per table if needed DEFAULT DATA X ENTRIES SET TO 1 Y AND Z ENTRIES SET TO 0 ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 704 Display shows 2 Press Volume button to select X Y or Z e g Z and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to option line 3 Press Volume button to move cursor to option digit desired e g 5 and enter 1 put under other digits as required Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 OR Press Right Soft button to return to step 1 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE Samsung Business Communications gt x lt IN DISPLAY 0123456789 0123456789 000000000000 0123456789 000001000000 2 199 CHAPTER 2 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL Enables the assignment of system speed dialling numbers There are up to 450 entries available for programming or 950 entries if set in MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS Each speed dial number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dialled These dialled digits may consist of 0 9 and If the sys tem recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access number it will automatically insert the separator NOTE If 500 entries are allowed the bin numbers are 500 945 i
261. ling Party Number to send to the net work UNKNOWN Unknown number INT NAT International number NATIONAL National number NETWORK Network specific number SUBSCRIB Subscriber number EXTEN Local number ABBREV Abbreviated number 2 118 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued No Option Description 5 NB PLAN Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the net work UNKNOWN Unknown numbering plan ISDN ISDN numbering plan CCITT E 163 164 DATA Data numbering plan CCITT X 121 TELEX Telex numbering plan CCITT F 69 NATIONAL National standard numbering plan PRIVATE Private numbering plan EXTEN Local numbering plan OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS STATIONS No Option Description 0 ANY CHANNEL When this option is set to YES the system will place calls on any free channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy e g Pre ferred channel selection If set to NO the user will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free e g Exclusive channel selection 1 POWER FEED This field determines if power to a BRI access will be supplied YES or NO CONDITIONS e ABRI card must be installed in the system Otherwise the NO BRI CARD message is displayed e If any changes are made in this MMC the BRI card that is affected
262. lls can be disconnected or the user can receive confirm tone refer to the CO Confirm timer in MMC 501 No Type Description 0 NONE No action 1 CONFIRM Caller hears confirmation tone at programmed time 2 DISCONNECT Call is disconnected DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 314 201 CO CONFIRM Display shows NONE 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 CO CONFIRM OR NONE Press Volume button to select station and use Right Soft button to move cursor OR Select all stations 3 Dial a feature option 0 2 OR ALL CO CONFIRM NONE 1205 Press Volume button to make selection press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 501 SYSTEM WIDE TIMERS Samsung Business Communications CHAPTER 2 315 CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION Customer Set Relocation allows the system administrator or technician to exchange similar stations in the system without hardware changes the button settings features etc for a phone can be copied to another The user can relocate to the new station and work as nor mal CONDITIONS Refer to the Relocate Allowed Table next page listing which phones AOMs can be ex changed DEFAULT
263. losest match and this entry will be se lected but if the next digit is anything other than 6 the 13 entry is the closest match Whenever a new entry is added the system will sort all entries in numerical order because this is the logical order in which the system analyzes digits Wild cards are checked after exact digits If 1813 and 18 are entered the system will check 1813 first If no match is found it will check 18 2 242 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 Press Transfer button and enter 746 Display shows Dial CALL COST entry e g 005 OR Press Volume button to select entry and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter digit string via the dial keypad and press Right Soft button Enter DIAL PLAN 1 8 e g 8 OR Press Volume button to select dial plan and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 433 COST RATE MMC 747 Samsung Business Communications RATE CALCULATION TABLE DISPLAY COST DP 001 DRGNE COST DP 005 DANGLE COST DP 005 DIGIT 1305 COST DP 005 CALL RATE 8 2 243 CHAPTER 2 747 RATE CALCULATION TABLE The RATE CALCULATION TABLE is used to define the billing charges for each CO
264. lphabetically arranged Programming list continued MMC Name MMC No HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY MMC 859 HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT MMC 512 HOT LINE OFF HOOK SELECTION MMC 306 HOTEL OPERATION MMC 813 HOTEL TIMER MMC 513 IDLE DISPLAY MMC 719 INITIALIZE PORT MMC 890 IP PHONE INFORMATION MMC 840 ISDN SERVICE TYPE MMC 220 ITEM COST TABLE MMC 760 KEY EXTENDER MMC 107 LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS MMC 829 LARGE LCD OPTIONS MMC 120 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE MMC 310 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC 710 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE MMC 713 LCR ROUTE TABLE MMC 712 LCR TIME TABLE MMC 711 MAINTENANCE BUSY MMC 853 MGI DSP OPTIONS MMC 835 MGI GROUP MMC 615 MGI PARAMETERS MMC 831 MGI USER MMC 616 MPD PRS SIGNAL MMC 414 MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE MMC 511 MSN DIGIT MMC 421 MY AREA CODE MMC 718 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION MMC 824 NEWS DISPLAY SPEED MMC 122 NODE INFO MMC 863 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING MMC 200 PHONE LANGUAGE MMC 121 PHONE RING TONE MMC 111 PHONE VOLUME MMC 114 PHONE VOLUME CONTROL MMC 807 Samsung Business Communications 1 19 1 Table 1 9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list continued MMC Name MMC No PICKUP GROUPS MMC 302 PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER MMC 320 PRI OPTIONS MMC 420
265. lume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 5 Dial call type via dial keypad 0 I 1 O or 2 B AUTO RECORD OR PORT 209 CALL B Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 250 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 753 WARNING DESTINATION This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built In Voice Mail card It provides an emer gency destination for calls destined for the card if the card is removed or is offline In addition any calls that are forwarded to the card will not forward they will remain ring ing at the fwd from station until answered This destination can be a station number or a group number DEFAULT DATA 5000 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 753 WARNING DEST Display shows DEST 500 2 Dial station number or group number WARNING DEST OR DEST 501 Press Volume button to scroll through numbers and select 3 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 251 CHAPTER 2 754 HALT This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built In Voice Mail It is used to halt the Voice Mail Module
266. m data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 27 MJC12 E911 Restart The E911 card has restarted Alarm data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 28 MJC13 E911 Block The E911 card has blocked because the system detects the card does not work correctly Alarm data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 31 MJC16 WLI Restart The WLI card has restarted Alarm data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 32 MJC17 WLI Block The WLI card has blocked because the system Samsung Business Communications detects the card does not work correctly Alarm data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 2 339 CHAPTER 2 2 340 continued No Code Alarm Name Definition MJD DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault 33 MJDO1 Sync Failure Clocking on TEPRI cards has become asynchronous 34 MJD02 Sync Recovery Clocking on TEPRI cards has become synchronous 35 MJD03 Red Alarm Locally detected loss of PCM carrier on TEPRI card for more than 250 ms Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 36 MJD04 Red Alarm Rec PCM carrier detected locally on TEPRI cards Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 37 MJD05 Yellow Alarm Remotely detected failure transmitted in frame on TEPRI card Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 38 MJD06 Yellow Alarm Remotely detected failure restored transmitted on Rec TEPRI card Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 39 MJD07 Blue Alarm All 1 s being transmitted on facility on card Alarm Data
267. making the call This is a leading digits table and the system will look for the exact leading digits in the table that match the number dialled For example if a user dials 1305 and the COSTING DIAL PLAN contains 1 1308 and 1312 the dialled digits will be matched to 1 because 1308 and 1312 do not form a complete match When this table is created by the technician or when any new entries are added the system automatically places all entries in numerical order Wild cards can be used to represent any digit The Toll Restriction Wild Card Character assignment MMC 704 is common with Call Costing and Toll Restriction When all entries are used LAST ENTRY is displayed DIAL PLAN This shows in the programming display as DP and represents a pattern 1 7 8 This pattern is used by MMC 433 TRUNK COST RATE to determine the correct billing according to MMC 749 RATE CALCULATION TABLE When the system finds a DIAL PLAN match for the digits dialled the system checks MMC 749 to see what RATE CALCULATION to use for costing the call EXAMPLES When a station user dials a number the system will search the COSTING DIAL PLAN to find a match If 13056 is dialled and this MMC contains entries 1 13 1305 and 1401 the closest match is 1305 and this will be selected If 1305 is dialled and this MMC contains entries 1 13 13056 and 1401 no action will be taken until the station user dials another digit If the next digit is 6 the 13056 entry is the c
268. matic upgrade start time 2 INTERVAL IP based phone software automatic 10 seconds upgrade interval time 11 MGI ALIVE PERIOD Set the time interval of checking the link connec tion of MGI card and the system 13 LICENSE KEY Insert the license key to enable SoftPhone connec NONE tion 14 LICENSE STATUS The status Valid or Invalid of the inserted license key 15 DATACARD IPC Set the value YES or NO to support IPC by DATA YES CARD 16 MP MGI VM KEY Insert the license key to enable MGI VM ports 17 MGI VM STATUS The status of the inserted MP MGI VM license key 1 MGI ALLOW 0 8 2 VMS ALLOW 0 4 DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION Samsung Business Communications 2 323 CHAPTER 2 1 2 3 4 5 Press Transfer button and enter 841 Display shows the first available option Enter option category number 0 13 via dial Keypad e g 2 OR Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter option number via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter option data OR Press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 199 SHOW LICENSE STATUS MMC 840 IP PHONE INFORMATION 2 324 DISPLAY PHONE VERSION
269. mber 0 3 NETWORK CODE OR 01 USE NONE Press Volume buttons to select number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter number 0 16 ETWORK CODE OR oT USE NONE zi Press Volume buttons to select number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter network access code via dial keypad NETWORK CODE 02 1234 USE NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 217 CHAPTER 2 5 Enter use option number 0 3 NETWORK CODE OR 0231234 wSins ce Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 400 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TRUNK MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE 2 218 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 717 UCD AGENT ID This MMC defines UCD agent ID numbers or PIN numbers These numbers are used to log UCD agents into the UCD groups There are 100 available entries and each entry is tied to a specific UCD group Agent ID codes can be up to 4 digits long DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 717 AGENT PIN 001 Display shows inp GRP NONE 2
270. means that there is no retry counter and the caller will remain in the UCD queue until answered Any non zero value will route a caller through the UCD loop that many times before going to the final destination The UCD will route calls to the final destination im mediately if all members of the group are either out of group or in DND Example If this counter is set to 02 callers reaching a busy group will hear the first UCD message be placed on hold hear the second UCD message be placed on hold and finally hear the second message again before being transferred to the final destination 2 179 CHAPTER 2 04 05 Option FINAL DESTINATION RING NEXT TIME continued Description This is the final destination for the caller if not answered by a UCD agent This destination is only reached if a the caller dials an exit digit during a message or b the retry count has expired The final destination can be a station number a group number a discon nect or another plan Plans are entered by pressing button A plus two digits 01 12 A disconnect is entered as a destination of NONE Hold button If the final destination is a voice mail port the port will receive a FWD from UCD group integration message The final destination will forward or overflow If the forward to destination is a voice mail port the port will re ceive FWD from UCD group integration message
271. mming list MMC No MMC Name MMC 100 STATION LOCK MMC 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE MMC 102 CALL FORWARD MMC 103 SET ANSWER MODE MMC 104 STATION NAME MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL MMC 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC 108 STATION STATUS MMC 109 DATE DISPLAY MMC 110 STATION ON OFF MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE MMC 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK MMC 113 VIEW MEMO NUMBER MMC 114 PHONE VOLUME MMC 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE MMC 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE MMC 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE MMC 118 CONFERENCE GROUP MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY MMC 120 LARGE LCD OPTIONS MMC 121 PHONE LANGUAGE MMC 122 NEWS DISPLAY SPEED MMC 125 EXECUTIVE STATE MMC 199 SHOW LICENSE Samsung Business Communications 1 7 CHAPTER 1 1 4 2 Operator Level Programming A technician can do programming within the range set by the MMC 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER Programming is allowed for any phone within the tenant group but it can be done for only one phone at a time 1 4 2 1 System Related MMC The MMC programs related to the function of the system are as follows Table 1 2 System Related MMC list MMC No MMC Name MMC 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING MMC 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE MMC 204 COMMON BE
272. mmunications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued No Option Default Description 15 INCOMING this option is set to YES the duration of calls ringing ANSWER before being answered will print on SMDR 16 INTERCOM CALL NO This option determines whether intercom calls will print on SMDR 17 KEY MMC IN OUT NO If set to YES the SMDR record will show programming being opened and closed in MMC 200 and MMC 800 20 HOTEL PAGE END This option determines where the page feed is inserted FEED on HM REPT Hotel Application Only 21 HOTEL START 0 This option determines that the number of empty lines LINE per each page on HM REPT Hotel Application Only 23 DID NUM NAME YES If this option is set to YES received DID information will print on SMDR 24 ITP NO If set to YES the SMDR record will show registration of REGISTRATION ITP phones 25 SET NO If set to YES the SMDR record will show Set Reloca RELOCATION tions ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY Samsung Business Communications 2 237 CHAPTER 2 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 725 PAGE HEADER Display shows PRINT YES 2 Dial the option number e g 01 LINE PER PAGE OR 60 LINE PAGE Use the Volume
273. move cursor 2 244 DISPLAY COST RATE 1 1ST DUR 000 SEC COST RATE 3 1ST DUR 000 SEC Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 3 Dial option number 0 4 e g 1 COST RATE 3 OR 1ST COST 000 Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter data via dial keypad e g 125 1 25 COST RATE 3 OR 15 Press Volume button to select data and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 433 COST RATE MMC 746 COSTING DIAL PLAN Samsung Business Communications 2 245 CHAPTER 2 750 VM CARD RESTART This MMC is used for the Samsung Built In Voice Mail card There are four options available in this MMC No Option Description 0 MBX DOWNLOAD When the Built In Voice Mail module starts part of the power up procedure will download data from the system to determine time date what mailboxes to create and system numbering plan This must be done at least once but once done this download feature can be turned NO to save boot up time VIRTUAL NUMBER DOWNLOAD VM CONNECTION DEFAULT DATA ALL OPTIONS ARE NO 2 246 This option is determine which type virtual port include during mailbox and system number
274. ms other than SELF are used for station numbers and can be omitted DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 820 SELF LINK ID Display shows 2 Enter SELF link ID via dial keypad and SELF LINK ID press Right Soft button 11 3 Press Volume button to select other link ID SYS01 LINK ID and press Right Soft button to mover cursor 4 Enter other link ID via dial keypad and SYSO1 LINK ID press Right Soft button 22 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK MMC 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS MMC 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS 2 284 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK Assigns the Q signalling PRI trunk for networking It is assigned data on a per TEPRI card basis DEFAULT DATA NORMAL ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 821 2 3 4 Display shows Enter first trunk number of PRI card OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter 0 for NORMAL or 1 for Q SIGNALLING OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY VOI
275. msung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME Samsung Business Communications 2 19 CHAPTER 2 110 STATION ON OFF Allows the system administrator to set any of the phone features listed below 2 20 No Feature Default Description 00 01 AUTO HOLD AUTO TIMER OFF ON Automatically places an existing Trunk Line call on hold if a CALL key trunk key or trunk route key is pressed dur ing that call Automatically starts the stopwatch timer during a Trunk Line call 02 HEADSET USE OFF When ON this feature disables the hook switch allowing a headset user to answer all calls by pressing the ANS RLS button or SEND and END buttons 03 HOT KEYPAD ON When ON this feature allows you to dial directory num bers without having to first lift the handset or press the Speaker button 04 KEY TONE ON Allows you to hear a slight tone when pressing buttons on phone 05 PAGE REJOIN ON Allows you to hear the remaining part of page an nouncements if phone becomes free during a page 06 RING PREF ON When OFF requires you to press the fast flashing button to answer a ringing call after lifting the handset 07 08 C
276. n of the trunk card DEFAULT DATA UNIT COST PER MP 0200 PENCE CALL COST RATE 100 PERCENT ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 508 UNIT COST PER MP Display shows 0200 PENCE 2 Dial 0Oor 1 CALL COST RATE OR 100 Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter new value e g 110 CALL COST RATE System returns to step 2 110 eg s 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 110 STATION ON OFF CALL COST OPTION 2 158 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 510 SLI RING CADENCE Provides the ability to customize the ring cadence for single line ports on a system wide basis There are five cadences available When changing the MMC 510 MMC 510 should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance CAUTION of the local SAMSUNG distributor No Item Description 1 STN RING This is the cadence intercom calls will ring at 2 TRK RING This is the cadence trunk calls will ring at 3 DOOR RING This is the cadence door phone calls will ring at 4 ALM RING This is the cadence alarm reminder calls will ring at 5 CBK RING This is the cadence callbacks will ring at DEFAULT DATA unit milliseconds Item ON OFF ON OFF STN RING 1000 3000 1000 3000 TRK RI
277. n to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications 2 115 CHAPTER 2 417 E1 PRI CRC4 OPTION This option is used to enable disable CRC4 generation and checking CONDITIONS This is useful with some networks which do not support CRC4 framing but only PCM30 framing After changing this option MMC 418 must be used to restart the card to make the change effective DEFAULT DATA CRC4 ON ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 417 Display shows 2 Enter first trunk number in PRI card e g 701 OR Press Volume button to select trunk and use Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter 1 for ON 0 for OFF OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 418 BRI amp PRI CARD RESTART 2 116 701 ON 701 ON 701 OFF Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY H1 PRI CRC iila CAKE ET PRI CRE OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 418 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART This MMC is used to restart a BRI or PRI card at the card level This action is required to update the processor on the BRI or PRI
278. nal 00 49 System 500 999 VG SVM 800 Group Message Station group number VM VM Memo Extension or station group number VT Voice Transfer VM group number DEFAULT DATA NONE 2 14 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 107 201 EXT MAST Display shows first station 01 CALLI gt 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 EXT MAST OR 01 CALLI gt Use Volume button to scroll through station numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Enter key number e g 18 205 EXT MAST OR 18 DS2 Use Volume button to scroll through keys and use Right Soft button to move the cursor OR Press the key to be programmed 205 EXT MAST 198 DES DS_ 4 Dial extender according to above table 205 EXT MAST System will return to step 3 18 DS DS207 5 Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 OR Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next When using the Right Soft button When the Right Soft button will not move the cursor to the right you are attempt NOTE ing to add an extender to a key that cannot have one RELATED ITEMS MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN Samsung Business Communications 2 15 CHAPTER 2
279. nd advance to next MMC 1 2 2 DS ITP 5000 Series Phones These include the DS 5038S DS ITP 5021L DS ITP 5021D DS ITP 5014D DS 5014S and DS 5007S Examples are shown in the figures below Programmable Buttons 21 Soft Buttons Scroll Button Speaker Telephone Status Indicator LCD Displ A Button PIE Dial Buttons Speaker Button Hold Button Microphone Figure 1 2 0 5038 Phone Samsung Business Communications 1 3 CHAPTER 1 DS ITP 5014D Programmable Buttons 14 A Button Speaker Speaker Button Dial Buttons Hold Button Microphone gt 2 LLL DS ITP5021D Programmable Buttons 21 Programmable Buttons Soft Buttons Scroll Button Telephone Status Indicator LCD Display Volume Button Redial Button CAI ce Conference Button EZEN au Transfer Button Navigation Button Figure 1 3 DS ITP 5014D 5021D Phone Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide DS 5014S DS 5007S Programmable Buttons 14 Programmable Buttons 7 A Button Z Programmable Buttons Soft Buttons e Scroll Button Pads _ i 1 d WA i Qoi M Status Indicator LCD screen ae LA Volume Button Redial Button Conference Button Transfer Button Dial Buttons Speake
280. ng Business Communications 2 89 CHAPTER 2 317 ASSIGN STATION STATION USE This MMC is used to determine whether stations in one use group can make intercom calls to stations in other use groups within the same tenant Use groups are set up in MMC 614 DEFAULT DATA DIAL YES ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 317 2 3 4 5 Display shows Dial the first station use group number e g 005 OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button OR Select all station use groups Dial the second station use group number e g 004 OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button Dial 1 for YES or 0 for means first group cannot dial second group OR Press Volume button to select YES NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 614 STATION TRUNK USE GROUP 2 90 DISPLAY 001 USE 001 DIAL YES 005 USE 001 ALL USE 001 DIAL YES 005 USE 004 DIAL YES 005 USE 004 DIAL NO Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 318 DISTINCTIVE RINGING Allows the technician to select the ring tone heard at a keyset when called by a specific sta tion or when a specific trun
281. ng the hook flash will not toggle between the two calls it will disconnect the second call and reconnect the single line phone to the first call 26 RECALL DISC OFF When ON the system disconnects a transferred call when it recalls 29 ARD TONE CHK ON When system detects CO BUSY TONE from Central Office it returns to auto redial state 30 VPN ENABLE OFF When ON VPN is enabled Australia only 31 IN TOLL CHK OFF When OFF the system doesn t toll restrict incoming calls 32 ISDN PROG OFF When ON if an outgoing call receives PROGRESS mes CON sage from ISDN trunk the call will connect without CON NECT message 33 INCLUDE VAT OFF When ON an Inclusive VAT line is printed on Hotel in voices Hotel Application 36 DSS KEY DPU OFF When ON pressing a DS key will pick up the call at a ringing station 37 BEGN DGT DSP OFF When ON and an outside call is made via speed dial or LNR where more than 11 digits are dialled then only the first 11 dialled digits are shown on the phone display 38 ONE TCH OFF When OFF phone users cannot use one touch account FACC code ACC key Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued No Option Default Description 39 SGRALL OUT OFF When ON the last remaining station group member can leave a group 40 CHAIN FWD ON If ON an incoming call forwarded from a station to anothe
282. nk may be defined with up to eight cost rates Enter one or more of the eight COST RATES per trunk If an entry is left blank no call costing will be calculated for that particular DIAL PLAN Call type 8 is fixed for incoming calls Select cost rate type 8 only if you want incoming call costing for a trunk DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS ALL DIAL PLANS ALL COST RATES ASSIGNED ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 433 70 312945079 Display shows trunk number and Cost Rate CR Sabai italia gt table numbers 2 Dial trunk number e g 705 705 312345676 OR CR Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR Select all 3 Press Volume button to move cursor along the line until 701 12345678 the cursor is under the Cost Rate number e g 2 CR 710111111 Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right Soft button to return to step 1 OR 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit RELATED ITEMS MMC 746 COSTING DIAL PLAN MMC 747 RATE CALCULATION TABLE Samsung Business Communications 2 133 CHAPTER 2 434 CONNECTION STATUS This read only MMC will confirm the connection status of stations or trunks Display status displays the status of a station or trunk at the time requested If a conference is in progress with the selected trunk or station the display will show one of the conference par ties and an arrow The technici
283. ns to from this IP will require involvement of the MGI card The system identifies communications to from this address as public This allows devices on remote networks subnets to establish communications with the system without exposing the LAN See SYSTEM IP TYPE For reference and cannot be changed The unique hardware MAC address of the MCP card 12 13 PCMMC ADDRESS SM MANAGER IP When the system wants to connect to PCMMC it will be sent to this IP address for a connection message Reserved for future use Not used 14 CTI SERVER ADDR IP address of CTI Server 17 NEWS ADDRESS IP address of News Server 18 19 MMS SERVER IP MMS WEB SERV IP Samsung Business Communications IP address of MMS Server IP address of MMS WEB Server 2 297 CHAPTER 2 ETHERNET PARAMETERS The first three parameters SYSTEM IP ADDR SYSTEM GATEWAY and SYS NOTE TEM NET MASK are stored separately from the main system database and thus will not be defaulted when MMC811 CLEAR MEMORY is performed Further more any changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MCP2 is re set When changing any IP address value three digits must be entered for each octet field For example 192 168 1 10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010 CONDITIONS This MMC must be used if there are ITP phones and or MGI card
284. nstalled and this option is set to ON the system will provide the CID signal to SLTs 22 NO FLASH OFF When the hook switch is flashed or the flash key is pressed a recall signal will not be sent to the system 23 RBK STN NAME OFF When ringback station name can be displayed instead of Ringing Samsung Business Communications 2 71 CHAPTER 2 DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 300 201 CUS ON OFF Display shows ACCESS DIAL ON 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 CUS ON OFF OR ACCESS DIAL ON Press Volume button to select station OR Select all stations and press Right Soft button to ALL CUS ON OFF move cursor ACCESS DIAL ON 3 Press Volume button to select feature and ALL CUS ON OFF press Right Soft button to move cursor ACCESS DIAL ON 4 Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF ALL CUS ON OFF OR ACCESS DIAL Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button 5 Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 Press Right Soft button to return to step 1 OR Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS LCR PROGRAMMING MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE 2 72 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide
285. ntinued Description This is the timer value that will cause unanswered calls to a group to begin also ringing the NEXT PORT see below after this timer has elapsed If set to 000 no overflow will take place 3 GROUP TRANSFER This is a timer that will determine how long Trunk Line calls transferred to the group will ring at the group before recalling If set to 000 no recall will take place 4 NEXT PORT This is the station or group number that callers will also ring at if the OVER FLOW feature has been programmed The OVERFLOW DESTINATION can be defined as 1 COMMON BELL There is a common bell port on each MIS card 2 RING OVER PAGE The ROP port can be defined as the NEXT port 3 STATION OR STATION GROUP Any station or station group can be defined as the NEXT port 5 MEMBER List all members that are to be in the group Up to 32 members for the System are allowed in each group but stations can be assigned to mul tiple station groups 6 NEXT HUNT The length of time a call will ring at a station before it hunts to the next group member 7 GROUP BUSY When this option is set to ON a busy signal will be sent to the caller if all group members are busy When this option is set to OFF the ring back tone is sent to the caller even if all group members are busy UCD is an exception to this rule This option only works when MMC 210 SGR INC BUSY is set to OFF When MMC 210 SGR INC BUSY is set to O
286. ny recall hold or transfer continues to recall at your station before it recalls to the operator ROUTE OPTIMISE 5 0 250 SEC When a call is made via Q SIG signalling route optimization is activated after this time SMDR START DP 30 1 250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR re cording for rotary dialing SMDR START DTMF 15 1 250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for touchtone dialling This timer also controls the LCD duration timer on the phones The du ration time displayed and the SMDR time dura tion will be the same SYS HOLD RECALL 45 0 250 SEC This timer determines the time calls can be left on hold before recalling to the holding station This is a system wide timer Setting the timer to 000 means that no recalling will take place 2 144 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued Timer Name Default Range Unit Description TRANSFER RECALL 20 0 250 SEC This timer determines how long transferred calls ring before recalling This is a system wide timer TRK AUTOMOH DISC 60 1 250 SEC When set to ON incoming trunk calls are connected to MOH automatically after the DISA ANSWR timer MMC 503 expires In this case the caller hears MOH If the TRK AUTOMOH DISC timer expires before the call is answered the call is disconnected TSW CONN DELAY 0 0 10 SEC When an incoming trunk makes an outgoing call to anothe
287. o Parameter Description Default 13 GRQ SEND Select ON or OFF for use of Gatekeeper RAS Re OFF quest GRQ messages 14 USE MULTI E 164 When this option is set to ENABLE the E 164 identi DISABLE fier can be assigned 15 E 164 LISTS This is the E 164 identifier used by the H 323 trunk NONE when registering with the gatekeeper There is a maximum 32 E 164 identifier lists with a digit string length of 16 digits 16 REGISTERED Display the status of registration to the Gatekeeper NO DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 836 GK CONNECTION Display shows the first available option DISABLE 2 Enter H 323 GK option via dial keypad GK ROUTING OR DISABLE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter H 323 GK option data GK ROUTING OR ENABLE Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return step 3 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 834 H 323 OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications 2 311 CHAPTER 2 837 SIP OPTIONS 2 312 This MMC permits the adjustments of optional Session Initiation Protocol SIP trunk pa rameters The MCP supports SIP and H 323 on a per call per port basis The settings are system wide NOTE When changing IP When changing any IP address valu
288. o move cursor 3 Dial 01 10 to select message OR Press Volume button to select message and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter message and press Right Soft button to return to step 3 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING 2 32 DISPLAY 201 TXTMSG 01 Blank Message 205 TXTMSG 01 Blank Message 205 TXIMSG 02 Blank Message 205 TXTMSG 02 SAME TIME Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 118 CONFERENCE GROUP Allows the system administrator or technician to set conference groups for any station A station is allowed up to five conference groups and each group can include 4 members excluding the station itself Names can be allocated to groups Conference members can be other stations station groups and external telephone numbers which must include the outgoing access code CONDITIONS Only stations set to use conference groups in MMC 612 can be selected here Large LCD phones are automatically set to use conference groups ENTERING CONFERENCE GROUP NAME Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 118 Display shows 2 Dialstation number e g 205 OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to
289. ode Program List by User s Level WN For more information about the programming level refer to 1 4 Program List by NOTE User s Level of this chapter Samsung Business Communications 1 1 CHAPTER 1 1 2 Digital Phones You need a digital display LCD phone in order to carry out programming These include DCS Euro keysets and DS ITP 5000 Series keysets and some examples are described in the following sections All use special programming buttons to select options on the display screen 1 2 1 DCS Euro Phones 1 2 Volume Control Buttons Soft Buttons 3 Volume control for handset Used to activate ring speaker etc features via the display Scroll Button Used to select start menu and scroll through display options 000000 m 000000 Programmable Buttons With tri coloured LEDs 24B 16 12B 8 SCROLL REDIAL MEMORY Memory Button Redial Button DND Button Speaker Button TRSF RECALL Programmable Buttons With red LEDs 24B 8 12B 4 6B 6 1 1 1 HOLD ANS RLS Microphone 2 M Pullout Directory ecall Button Tray 5 Dial Button Hold Button Speaker Transfer Button ANS RLS Button For hands free operation Used in place of handset Figure 1 1 24B LCD DCS Euro Phone 24B LCD phone has 24 programmable buttons left col
290. ode item 0 6 via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter access code data via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 833 VOIP IP TABLE MMC 834 H 323 OPTIONS MMC 836 H 323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY 0 00 ACCESS DGT 0 0 00 ACCESS DGT 0 01 ACCESS DGT SIDG iL 0 01 ACCESS DGT 840 2 303 CHAPTER 2 833 VoIP IP TABLE This MMC provides the IP addresses in tables pointed to by the VoIP code entry MMC 832 There are 63 tables with up to 16 entries each The destination IP address is required to route dialled digits based on the access code and digits dialled The IP entry field is di vided into 4 sections allowing modification of separate IP address fields When changing IP When changing any IP address value listed below three digits must be input for each octet field Example 192 168 1 10 input must be 192 168 001 010 DEFAULT DATA TB 00 ENTRY 00 MMC 830 SYSTEM IP ADDR ALL OTHERS EMPTY ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 Press Transfer button and enter 833 Display shows the first table numb
291. on NO for SLTs The CID Ringing table consists of 100 entries DEFAULT DATA NONE Option Description CLI CID number to be received from the central office Up to 16 digits may be entered REJ CID call reject option When this sets YES if a call comes that matched CID number and CLI field then the system will be reject call PRI CID priority option There are 9 priority levels priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest When calls into station group come and group mem bers are all busy the system will assign a priority to the CID number so that calls from a high priority CID number will be placed at the front of the group queue If this option sets NO the longest call that placed at the group queue has the highest priority R1 XXX R2 XXX R3 XXX R4 XXX R5 XXX R6 XXX Ring plan and destination during each ring plan The destination can be a station station group TONE Ring Tone options for a specific CID Number NO 1 8 Calls will ring with the phone users choice of ring frequency 1 8 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring phones with this ring frequency CAD Ring Cadence options for a specific CID Number at SLT s NO 1 5 Samsung Business Communications No Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences 1 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT s with the intercom ring cadence 2 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT
292. on to move cursor 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 254 DISPLAY SET VMMOH 301 NOT USED SET VMMOH 301 NOT USED SET VMMOH 301g 25 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 757 VM IN OUT This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built In Voice Mail It is used to assign each Voice Mail port as used for incoming outgoing or both way calls This MMC must support outgoing calls if off premises notification beeper outbound follow me or outbound notifi cation is used DEFAULT DATA IN OUT ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 757 VM IN OUT Display shows 301 IN OUT 2 Dial VM number e g 301 VM IN OUT OR 301 IN OUT Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter option via dial keypad e g IN VM IN OUT OR 301 IN Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 255 CHAPTER 2 758 DAY NIGHT This is only used for the Samsung Built In Voice Mail The module can operate in either a DAY or NIGHT operating mode The mode determines what main menu greetings
293. on to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME MMC 861 Samsung Business Communications NO NO Or NOR SYSTEM OPTIONS AUTO UPDATE TIME DISPLAY YY START YY START YY START OS 3105 END END END omn 2 165 CHAPTER 2 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP Used to assign an operator group for each ring plan DEFAULT DATA RING PLAN 1 6 500 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 600 OPERATOR GROUP Display shows 18500 23506 2 Dial the ring plan number 1 6 OPERATOR GROUP OR 1 500 2 500 Press Right Soft button to advance the cursor 3 Dial the group number OPERATOR GROUP OR 15501 28500 Press Volume button to select group and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP 2 166 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP This MMC is used to build all station groups There are 40 programmable groups available The options for setting up these groups are as follows No Option Description 0 TYPE This is the type of group you are creating and can be one of the follow ing 0 NORMAL Used to assign stations in a ring group The members can be stations common b
294. on to select COS categories and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial COS usable feature option e g 12 COS CONTENTS 06 OR 12 DND YES Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to move cursor Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES COS CONTENTS 06 OR 12 DND NO Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 700 COPY COS CONTENTS Samsung Business Communications 2 195 CHAPTER 2 702 TOLL DENY TABLE Provides a way to make toll restriction call barring very easy and flexible There are 500 entries allowed in the deny table and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service Each index can have up to 12 digits With the use of wild cards MMC 704 Assign Wild Character more flexibility can be built into toll restriction Wild cards can be used repeat edly in the dial string limited only to what is allowed or denied in MMC 704 Six toll levels B to are programmable Toll level A is set as unrestricted by default and toll level H is set as in house only by default DEFAULT DATA ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0 PROGRAM BUTTONS A Used to enter wild card X B Used to enter wild card Y Used to enter wild card 7 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 702 DENY 00
295. one to indicate another call 03 SMDR PRINT ON When the station is set for no Trunk Line calls to and from this station the station will not printon SMDR This includes transferred calls or calls picked up from hold or park 04 TGR ADV TONE ON When this feature is set to ON a warning tone will be heard each time LCR advances to the next route 05 VMAA FORWARD ON This feature selects whether Trunk Line calls can be forwarded to voice mail ON permits forward to voice mail OFF no forward to voice mail 07 NGT PASSCODE When ON the steps verifying the ring plan passcode will be added in Ring Plan change 08 INTRCOM SMDR OFF When the station is set to OFF the station will not print intercom calls on SMDR 09 FWD DELAY USE OFF When ON calls will overflow to the Forward No Answer destination when the Forward No Answer timer expires even when the Forward No Answer feature is not acti vated at the called party extension 11 FORWARD OVRD OFF When set to ON and the station calls another station which has forwarding set the call will not forward 12 RECL TO OPER OFF When the station is set to ON if the station transfers a call and the destination doesn t answer the call will recall to the operator instead of the station 13 SLT LP OPEN OFF When ON SLI port receives real disconnect signal in stead of busy or error tone VMAA or DATA ports al ways receive real disconnect signal 15 CID TO SLT OFF When MIS is i
296. opposite party disconnect the call the PRS DET TM must be set to 0 0 2500 MSEC 09 RNG DET TM RING DETECT TIME This is the minimum length of 10 2500 MSEC ring signal the system will regard as a valid ring 10 WINK TIME This is the duration of the acknowledgment signal that the system will send on an E amp M circuit 100 300 MSEC 11 MF DP INT This is the interval between sending digit In case of DTMF signal over the 500ms will be serviced as 100 ms 100 9900 MSEC 12 MFR DLY TM Samsung Business Communications This is a delay time to allocate the MFR after incom ing trunk is detected This is to prevent the wrong detection of DTMF signal by noise 0 25 SEC 2 149 CHAPTER 2 Item continued Range 13 DISAANSWR This is a delay time to answer the DISA trunk call or 0 9 SEC to answer the trunk when TRK AUTO ANSWER is set to ON MMC400 14 CONN DELAY This is the delay time to connect a voice path when 0 2500 MSEC DEFAULT DATA ANS BAK TM 0600 MSEC CLEARING 2000 MSEC CO SUPV TM 0400 MSEC DUR 0100 MSEC F DGT DELY 0600 MSEC FLASH TIME 0090 MSEC NO RING TM 04 SEC PAUSE TIME 03 SEC PRS DET TM 0000 MSEC RNG DET TM 0300 MSEC users make outgoing calls via a loop trunk This is to prevent users hearing noise when the loop trunk is seized WINK TIME 200 MSEC MF DP INT 0
297. played 01 CURR STATUS OFF Current status of the LAN printer 02 EMPTY BUFF NO Prints all data left in the buffer 03 UPDATE LAN NO Applies modified values set in this MMC 04 DESTINATION OFF Data transmit destination Off Printer PC Both 05 PRINTER IP 200 1 1 1 The IP address of the LAN printer 06 PRINTER TCP 10010 The TCP port of the printer 07 LAN TCP 10020 LAN TCP port 08 RETRY COUNT 03 Re transmit attempt count 00 10 09 RETRY WAIT 010 sec Wait time for re transmit 005 250 sec 10 PJL ENABLE FALSE Sets PJL 0 FALSE 1 TRUE 11 LANGUAGE RAW Printer language 0 RAW 1 PCL 2 PS 12 PAPER SIZE A4 Paper size 0 A4 1 LETTER 13 FONT TYPE COURIER Font type 0 COURIER 1 TIMES NEW ROMAN 14 DUPLEX ENAB FALSE Sets duplex 0 FALSE 1 TRUE 15 ORIENTATION PORTRAIT Orientation 0 PORTRAIT 1 LANDSCAPE 16 PRINT TRAY DEFAULT Printer tray 0 Default 1 Tray1 2 Tray2 3 Manual 17 RESOLUTION 300 Resolution 0 300 1 600 18 LINE PAGE 60 Lines per page Samsung Business Communications 2 295 CHAPTER 2 DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 829 01 DATA TYPE Display shows SMDR 2 Enter type of data to be printed 02 DATA TYPE OR UCD REPORT Press Volume button to select the type and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Enter the item number 02 PRINTER IP OR 200 11 i Press Volume button to selec
298. ports can be used for enhanced proprietary Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7100 systems on a pub lic IP network 4 VOIP TRUNK 5 PUB IP TRK This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry standard H 323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications across a private network This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry standard H 323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications on a public network 6 MGI3 NEEDED This determines what MGI ports can be used for T 38 facsimile commu nications across a private network 7 PUB IP MGI3 This determines what MGI ports can be used for T 38 facsimile commu nications on a public network 8 ITP PAGED This determines what MGI ports can be used with station page to ITP phones across a private IP network The MGI ports have two selection modes Sequential or Distributed The members for each selection are the actual ports on the MGI card s DEFAULT DATA LOCAL MGI2 MGI3 PUB IP ITP MGI2 MGI3 VOIP NTWK MGI2 MGI3 PUB IP NTWK MGI2 MGI3 VOIP TRUNK MGD MGI3 PUB IP TRK MGD MGI3 2 188 MGI3 NEEDED MGI3 PUB IP MGI3 MGI3 ITP PAGED MGI2 MGI3 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 615 USER LOCAL ITP Display shows the first available option ODE SEQUENTIAL 2
299. ps CONDITIONS This feature is only for Large LCD phones e g ITP 5012L DS 5012L WIP 5000M DEFAULT DATA Large LCD phones are automatically set to allow this feature USED ACTION 1 2 3 4 Press Transfer button and enter 612 Display shows Enter the number of a station OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor Specify whether Group Conference feature can be used or not Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 118 CONFERENCE GROUP 2 186 201 DISPLAY CONE STN NOT US 202 NOT US 205 USED ED 100 FREE CONF STN ED 100 FREE CONF STN Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 614 STATION TRUNK USE GROUP This program allows you to assign stations to station use groups and trunks to trunk use groups This is useful if you want to restrict calling between stations outgoing calls through a trunk lines or call answering CONDITIONS Station use groups are numbered from 001 to 100 and trunk use groups from 101 to 200 DEFAULT DATA ALL STATIONS 001 ALL TRUNKS NONE ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 614 Display shows first station 2 EnterO if you want to set a station group Enter 1 if user want to set a trunk group OR Press Volume button to make selection
300. pulse tone conversion code E Used to mask unmask following digits shows as or ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 306 201 HOT LINE Display shows NONE 2 Dial station number 205 HOT LINE OR NONE Use Volume button to scroll through stations Press Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Enter the hot line destination of a station or 205 HOT LINE trunk ID e g 9 or 701 with a maximum of 9 1305P4264100 18 outgoing digits after the access code for the CO call see above list of options if needed 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 502 STATION WIDE TIMERS OFF HOOK SELECTION TIMER 2 80 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE Assigns a background music source to phones There is one internal music source external music source The default directory numbers for the music sources are 371 CONDITIONS To use an external sound source connect the corresponding port of the MOH source to the misc port of MP10 11 card If NONE is set for background music or if a sound source is not connected to the external sound source port designated as the background music source music will not be played even if the background music function is enabled DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 308
301. quired to place the system in different Ring Plans RP or change the Ring Time Override RTO 1 DISA ALARM The passcode required to clear a DISA ALARM generated when the number of DISA attempts are exceeded 2 ALARM CLR The passcode required to clear an ALARM generated by the disconnec tion of BI PMS SIO Hotel Application only 5 DELETE This passcode is used to allow items to be deleted from a room bill Hotel Application only 6 WLAN REGST The passcode required to register a WIP phone CONDITIONS e passcode is four digits long Each digit can be 0 9 The current passcode is required for this MMC DEFAULT DATA RING PLAN 0000 DISA ALARM 5678 ALARM CLR 8765 DECT REGST 4321 DELETE 9999 WLAN REGST 0000 ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 202 CHANGE PASSCODE Display shows DISPLAY RING PLAN 0000 2 Press Volume button to make selection and press CHANGE PASSCODE Right Soft button to move cursor to passcode entry AA RECORD 4321 3 Enter new passcode via digits from dial keypad CHANGE PASSCODE AA RECORD 9999 Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Continue to change other passcodes 2 46 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME Sams
302. r station may then be forwarded to the mailbox of the second station if the latter is set for forward to voice mail If this option is OFF the call may only be forwarded to the mailbox of the first station 41 MONITER OFF If ON the system will monitor the trunk supervision signal ling That is if a disconnection signal is received from the exchange the call will be cleared and the extension will go back on hook 42 VOIP MFRALOC OFF If ON this allocates a DTMF receiver for a VOIP tandem caller breaking out on another trunk group 43 NTWK OFF If OFF the call timer in the phone display will not function if AUTOTMR the call is from a network connection Q SIG 44 USE EURO OFF If ON the unit of currency shown in call displays and on SMDR reports will be Euros This will also display on Ho tel Application invoices 45 NO STAFF OFF When ON the steps verifying the staff code will be omitted in COD Hotel operation 46 PERIUCDSIO OFF When ON the PERI UCD data will be sent to the SMDR IO port 47 AUTO OFF Normally when a room is checked out the room status is CLEANED changed to NEED CLEAN When the option is set to ON the room status will be changed to AVAILABLE instead Hotel Application 48 REDIAL REVW OFF When ON the CALL LOG review will appear when the Re dial or LNR button is pressed 50 ISDN KEYFAC OFF If ON allows Keypad Facility messages to be sent to the exchange to invoke net
303. r Button Hold Button Microphone sesser cuc Figure 1 4 DS 5014S 5007S Phone The DS ITP 5000 series phones have 38 21 14 or 7 programmable buttons that can be programmed with functions Also there are several other function buttons the dial buttons the volume control buttons the redial button that allows you to redial the last phone num ber dialled the conference button for setting up conference calls the transfer button used to transfer a call to another station the hold button to hold a call the speaker button and the navigation buttons for easy selection of phone options and menus The LCD displays the station status and various other kinds of information Using three colors red green and yellow the station status indicator displays the current status of sta tion When programming other functions programmed on buttons are as follows e Volume Buttons Scroll through items in the display e Redial Button Select ALL option for making changes to all rather than individual stations trunks etc Soft Buttons Save data or move the cursor left and right e Speaker Button Save data and proceed to the next program Hold Button Erase the previously entered item A Button Select uppercase or lowercase text Transfer Button Enter the programming mode Samsung Business Communications 1 5 CHAPTER 1
304. r trunk the system connects the voice path after this time UCDS AUDIO ALARM 0 0 990 SEC When SVMi 20 card is installed and the digital UCD package enabled this counter determines the maximum number of seconds a call has been waiting at the UCD group before the UCD group s SUPV key begins to flash along with an audio alarm For more UCD alarm conditions see MMC 500 UCDS VISUAL ALARM 0 0 250 SEC When an SVMi 20 card is installed and the digital UCD package enabled this counter determines the maximum number of seconds a call at the UCD group before the UCD group s SUPV key begins to flash as an alarm For more UCD alarm conditions see MMC 500 VOIP RE ROUTE TM 15 0 25 SEC If an outgoing call made via a VoIP trunk does not receive an acknowledgement mes sage from the called party within this time the call is treated as failed When timers value is 0 Some timers are disabled when their value is set to 0 DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME TIMERS DEPEND ON COUNTRY Samsung Business Communications 2 145 CHAPTER 2 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 501 AA INT DGT TIME Display shows first timer value 05 SECO 2 Press Volume button to select timer and press KMMC LOCK OUT TM Right Soft button to move cursor 060 SECO 3 Enter new value using keypad if valid system KMMC LOCK OUT TM
305. rd or dial 0 for NO OR Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY Ceil Seil 8 Dirse CEES 8 Diis GNI 6 16 pins ie Di 5 2 271 CHAPTER 2 Press Volume button to make selection press Right Soft button 5 Dial 1 for YES to reset card or dial 0 for NO 1 5 6 OR ARE YOU SURE NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 2 272 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN 807 PHONE VOLUME CONTROL Allows the system administrator to set phone volume levels 0 KEY TONE VOL 0 LINE VOLUME 1 SIDETONE VOL 1 SPEAKER VOLUME 2 HANDSET TX 2 NOR LP ATTEN 3 MIC TX LEVEL 3 MIC LP ATTEN 4 NOISE GUARD 4 ACOU DECOUPL 5 NOISE THRES 5 ELEC DECOUPL 6 ALC THRES 6 T R RATIO 7 TX RX THRES 7 R T RATIO 8 TX RX COMP 9 MIN RX VOL 28D 12L 21D ITP When changing the MMC 807 MMC 807 PHONE VOLUME CONTROL should not be changed from the de CAUTION fault levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor Samsung Business Communications 2 273 CHAPTER 2 DEFAULT DATA
306. recovered and is in service via internal CO DEC test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 83 MNF20 PSUB Alarm Indicates there are over 120 ports in a cabinet with two PSUs Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 84 MNF21 DSS Alarm System capacity of 64 button DSS modules has been exceeded 85 MNF26 SIO RxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm Data SIO number SIO x 86 MNF27 SIO RxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm Data SIO number SIO x 87 MNF28 LAN Printer Err LAN printer error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm Data Data Type SMDR 88 MNF29 LAN Printer Rec LAN printer error has recovered in the MCP2 Alarm Data Data Type SMDR MNG Minor Error Minor Fault without Alarm Buffer saving 89 MNGO1 Phone Discon Indicates the Phone is disconnected nect Alarm Data Tel number or Cx Syy Pzz 90 MNG02 Phone Connect Indicates the Phone is connected Alarm Data Tel number or Cx Syy Pzz 91 MNGO03 Off Hook Alarm Indicates Extension Off Hook Alarm timer has expired Alarm Data Tel number or Cx Syy Pzz 92 MNG04 On Hook Indicates the Off Hook Alarm Extension is on hook Alarm Data Tel number or Cx Syy Pzz 93 MNG05 MGI Packet Loss Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet loss is more than 10 Alarm Data Tel number or Cx Syy Pzz 94 MNGO06 MGI Packet Delay Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet delay is more Samsung Business Communications than 500 ms
307. ress FEAT NUMBER PLAN Right Soft button to advance cursor PARK NONED_ 4 Enter digits e g 63 via the dial keypad FEAT NUMBER PLAN PARK NONE 63 5 Press Right Soft button to enter change and FEAT NUMBER PLAN continue to make changes PARK NONE 63 If an error message appears indicating duplication SAME DIAL EXIST of access code enter 1 for YES for change or CHANGE Y 1 N 0 enter 0 for NO for no change 6 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS ALL MMCs Samsung Business Communications 2 235 CHAPTER 2 725 SMDR OPTIONS Allows the system administrator to select the information printed on the SMDR report The following options may be selected No Option Default Description 00 PAGE HEADER YES This option determines whether a page header will print at the top of each page This would normally be turned off if SMDR is being sent to a Call Accounting machine 01 LINE PER PAGE 66 This option selects the length of each page to determine when to print the SMDR header The number of lines is in the range 01 99 02 INCOMING CALL YES This option determines whether incoming calls will print on SMDR 03 OUTGOING CALL YES This option determines whether outgoing calls will print on SMDR 04 AUTHORIZE NO This option determines wheth
308. ress Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS 2 52 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 208 ASSIGN RING TYPE Allows programming of single lines to have ICM ringing Trunk Line ringing and data se cure With the many types of external ringing devices all configurations can be met All devices will also have a positive disconnect signal Do not make VM AA ports data this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration No Type Description 0 ICM RING Follows normal SLI ring cadence 1 CO RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence 2 DATA RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence and does not support off hook ring DEFAULT DATA ICM RING ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 208 209 RING TYPE Display shows ICM RING 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 RING TYPE OR ICM RING Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 1 2 or 0 to select port type e g 2 205 RING TYPE OR DATA RING Press Volume button to select type and press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2 above 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 53 CHAPTER 2 209 ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE Designates to
309. rovides the operator with checkpoints for stable system operation CHECK NOTE Indicates additional information as a reference Console Screen Output lined box with Courier New font will be used to distinguish between the main content and console output screen text e Bold Courier font will indicate the value entered by the operator on the console screen ll Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Reference Guides The following guides are also provided with your OfficeServ 7100 system OfficeServ 7100 Installation Guide Describes the installation procedures and specifications for the OfficeServ 7100 system OfficeServ 7100 General Description Describes the business features available with the OfficeServ 7100 system WIP 5000M User Guide This is a user s guide for the WIP 5000M mobile telephone that is designed to use the wireless LAN provided by the OfficeServ 7100 system Revision History 02 2007 First Edition Samsung Business Communications m This page is intentionally left blank IV Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide SAFETY CONCERNS For product safety and correct operation the following information must be given to the operator user and shall be read before the installation and operation Symbols
310. rs and press Right Soft button to move OR ALL PBX LINE Select all trunks 3 Dial 1 for PBX or 0 for CO e g 1 704 PBX LINE OR PBX LINE Use Volume button to scroll through options Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 100 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE Used to determine the dialling type of each trunk line There are two options No Type Description 0 DTMF TYPE Dual Tone Multi Frequency 1 DIAL PULSE TYPE Dial Pulse DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS DTMF ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 402 701 DIAL TYPE Display shows DIMF TYPE 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 DIAL TYPE OR DTMF TYPE Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor OR ALL DIAL TYPE Select all E 3 Dial 0 for DTMF or 1 for PULSE 704 DIAL TYPE OR DIAL PULSE TYPE Use Volume button to scroll through options Press Right Soft buttons to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS MMC 503 TRUNK WIDE TIMERS Samsung Business Communications 2 101 CHAPTER 2 40
311. rsor Enter the Calling Party Number 230 SEND CLIP 463055922900 Repeat steps 3 amp 4 to enter other tables and Calling Party Numbers OR Repeat steps 2 3 amp 4 to enter other station or trunk and Calling Party Numbers Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 419 BRI OPTIONS MMC 420 PRI OPTIONS MMC 834 H 323 OPTIONS 2 96 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 326 RINGBACK TONE MESSAGE Assigns Color Ring Message by using SVMi message DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 326 301 RBT MSG Display shows NONE 2 Enter the VM station number 302 RBT MSG OR NONE Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button 3 Select Ring Message 0001 9999 302 RBT MSG OR 0001 Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS Samsung Business Communications 2 97 CHAPTER 2 400 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TRUNK Assigns several options listed below on a per trunk basis No Option Default Description 0 1A2 EMULATION TRUNK INC DND OFF OFF When this option is set to ON up to 4 internal stations can participate in a conversation on this trun
312. s 0 0 001 USED 0 0 0 200 1 10 5105 0 Uu 0 001 USED Os Ws IP 007 USED LOE LAY 8 31901 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION This MMC is used to set the WLAN configuration Parameter Description REGISTER VoWLAN Enable or disable registration of new WIP 5000M mobile phone WIP REGIST CLEAR wise the NORMAL mode clearing can be used Used to clear the registration of WIP FORCED mode clearing is used when the device is not connected normally e g device broken other WBS WEP SERVICE Enable or disable the WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy feature WEP KEY Assign the WEP key 13 characters only STATIC WBS IP Select the use of Static WBS IP STATIC WIP IP Select the use of Static WIP IP SELECT AP Select if using DUAL AP or BASIC APs DEFAULT DATA REGISTER VoWLAN DISABLE WIP REGIST CLEAR FORCED WBS WEP SERVICE DISABLE WEP KEY NONE STATIC WBS IP DISABLE STATIC WIP IP DISABLE SELECT AP TYPE BASIC AP DEPENDS ON COUNTRY ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 DISPLAY Press Transfer button and press 849 ENT Enter the PASSCODE ENTER PASSCODI This PASSCODE is assigned in MMC 202 WLAN REGST Select ENABLE to register a terminal ER PASSWORD EGISTER VoWLAN ENABLE Se
313. s Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button If you select YES the display shows Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Input save time OR Press Right Soft button to move cursor Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to make changes and return to step 9 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 280 CUST DBASE 12 01 01 CUS DBASE CLEAR SMDB CLEAR SMDB e P UST DBASE MCDB 00 00 MCDB NO ARE YOU SURE NO CUST DBASE CDB Cleared DAILY SAVE CUSTESD BAYS bir DANSE SAN Eis UIS DBASE DAILY SAVE GUSTS DBASE CORR CUST DBASE SYSDB 00 00 SYSDB 00 00 28 30 95558 JS Y SDB ARE YOU SURE YES Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 818 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD Change the system version by downloading the new version stored on the MC card to the APP SYS DRV WEB RUT MSP CSP and TEPRI cards
314. s on the system e After changing Ethernet parameters restart the system to apply the new settings DEFAULT DATA SYSTEM IP ADDR 165 213 97 185 SYSTEM GATEWAY 165 213 97 1 SYSTEM NET MASK 255 255 255 0 SYSTEM RESET NO SYSTEM IP TYPE PRIVATE IP ONLY SYSTEM PUBLIC IP 1 1 1 1 SYSTEM MAC ADDR CARD DEPENDENT PCMMC ADDRESS 168 219 1 101 SM MANAGER IP 0 0 0 0 CTI SERVER ADDR 0 0 0 0 NEWS ADDR 0 0 0 0 MMS SERVER IP 0 0 0 0 MMS WEB SERV IP 0 0 0 0 2 298 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 Press Transfer button and enter 830 Display shows the system IP address Press Volume button to make selection and Press Right Soft button to move cursor Using the keypad enter 3 digit IP numbers e g 192 168 001 010 for 192 168 1 10 Cursor will return to step 1 upon completion of IP address entry Press Volume button to make selection and Press Right Soft button to move cursor Using the keypad enter 3 digit IP numbers e g 192 168 001 001 for 192 168 1 1 Cursor will return to this step on completion of system gateway entry Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to store and move cursor Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE
315. s primarily used for 2 192 creating a new class of service COS If the unsupervised conference feature is allowed a programmed CONF key must be available to allow re entry into a conference call There are 30 classes of service available This MMC is divided into 5 categories No Category Description 0 TOLL LEVEL TOLL LEVEL 0 A Follow toll class A Unrestricted 1 B Follow toll class B in MMC 702 703 2 Follow toll class in MMC 702 703 3 D Follow toll class D in MMC 702 703 4 E Follow toll class E in MMC 702 703 5 F Follow toll class F in MMC 702 703 6 G Follow toll class G in MMC 702 703 7 H Follow toll class H All restricted 1 USABLE FEATURE No COS Default Description 00 AA CALER YES Auto answer control by caller 01 ABSENCE YES Absence 02 ALM CLR YES Alarm Clear 03 AUTO RDL YES Retry on busy 04 CALLBACK YES Callback 05 CLIP ABN YES Caller ID Abandon 06 CLIP INQ YES Caller ID Inquire 07 CLIP INV YES Caller ID Investigate 08 CONFER YES Conference 09 DALM CLR YES DISA alarm ring clear 10 DIRECT YES Directory dial 11 DISA YES Allow DISA use 12 DND YES Do Not Disturb 13 DND FWRD YES Forward Do Not Disturb 14 DND OVRD NO Do Not Disturb Override 15 DOOR YES Door ring answer 16 DSS YES Direct station select 17 DTS YES Direct trunk select 18 EXT AREC NO Intercom call automatic record SVM 800 19 EXT FWD YES External call forward
316. s to be inserted in the dialled digits 4 IP TABLE 1 This is the first table referenced for routing the access code to an IP address The system has 64 IP tables 00 63 with 16 entries 00 15 in each table See MMC 833 6 IP START This entry indicates where in a table to start looking for an IP code to 7 SERVER USE 2 302 associate with the access code This can be used to manage where to start looking for an IP address in high traffic VoIP gateway applications For example If IP address routing to the desired destination is known to be in the last seven entries of a table the IP START location would be 8 IP address searching would start at entry 8 This parameter determines whether a H 323 Gatekeeper will be utilized to establish this connection Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide DEFAULT DATA ACCESS DGT 00 09 digits 0 9 10 62 NONE DGT LENGTH 1 DEL LENGTH 1 INSERT DGT NONE IP TABLE 1 00 IP START NONE SERVER USE NO ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press Transfer button and enter 832 Display shows the outbound and first access code Enter 0 for O outbound or 1 for I inbound code table OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter access code table number 00 62 via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter access c
317. sfer button and enter 720 201 COPY KEY FROM NONE 2 3 4 Display shows Enter the station number to copy to e g 205 OR Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR Select all stations Enter station number to copy from e g 203 and cursor returns to step 2 OR Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS 205 COR Ix FROM NONE 205 Come 19 FROM 203 EY EY MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING 2 222 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING Provides a service tool which minimizes the accidental loss of programmable buttons on phones First the data is saved and then the station can be replaced with another station type or the keys can be reprogrammed to other features Once testing or replacement is com pleted the data can be restored to the individual station providing the same type is in place CONDITIONS This program must be used carefully because key programming data is saved to a common programming database When a new phone is connected the system copies data from this database to the new phone
318. shows RESET SYSTEM NO 2 Enter reset type 0 2 via dial keypad SYSTEM RESTART OR CLEAR MEMORY NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO SYSTEM RESTART OR CLEAR MEMORY YES Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 4 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO SYSTEM RESTART OR ARE YOU SURE YES Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 5 Ifclear memory system will return with default time and date and default extension number OR If system just restarted it will return to normal pro grammed status RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 276 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 812 SET COUNTRY CODE Selects the country for correct system programming and operation When changing the MMC 812 MMC 812 SET COUNTRY CODE should not be used from the default levels CAUTION without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 812 Display shows 2 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button 3 Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 811 RESET SYSTEM Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY SELECT COUNTRY Un
319. similar to unplugging and plugging in the phone and is useful for maintenance This value determines the transmission interval time of VoIP packets generated by the IP phone This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN PHONE DATA only The range is 10 40 ms NO 20 ms Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide No 11 12 Option JITTER BUF TOS FIELD Description Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN PHONE DATA only The range is 10 90 ms An 8 bit binary value that will be used by external routers switches etc that optionally support TOS bit prioritization to identify the transport priority value of data packets generated by the IP phone This value can be left at the default value 00000 if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN PHONE DATA only continued Default 20m All bits 0 13 S W VERSION Display IP phone software version Read only 14 S W UPGRADE This is used as IP phone software upgrade request command When YES is selected and Right Soft button is pressed the system requests IP phone software upgrade with TFTP IP address 15 TIME ZONE Allows remote IP phones to display own time zone 00 00 16 17 PUBLIC TO PUBLIC SIG TYPE When this option is set to US
320. sired eight levels within 11 0 TX LEVEL CONTROL MISC TSW GAIN Adjusts the transmitting sensitivity max 9 Default values are INDEX 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LEVEL 0 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 Adjusts the level of the internal music source of the MCP card or the external music source of the MIS card 0 7 higher numbers mean lower levels Default value is 0 TSW GAIN CONTROL Adjusts the tone sensitivity There are eight types of matrix connec tions of the T Switch that adjust the tone sensitivity 0 7 below Connection between Trunk lines are only applicable when set as 0 in MMC 421 0 DGP phone SLT SLI phone ATRK Analogue trunk DTRK Digital trunk DECT DECT terminal VOIP MGI port or IP based phone SVMi SVMi port WLAN WIP port CAUTION When changing the MMC 805 MMC 805 TX LEVEL AND GAIN should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor DEFAULT DATA DGP gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 6 0 1 9 SLT gt 0 0 2 5 0 0 2 5 6 0 0 0 6 0 1 9 ATRK gt 0 0 0 0 1 9 6 0 6 0 0 0 6 0 1 9 DTRK gt 0 0 2 5 1 9 0 0 6 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 9 6 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 VOIP gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 SVMi gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 WLAN gt 6 0 2 5 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 9 Samsung Business Communications 2 269 CHAPTER 2
321. ss ANS RLS button to select all stations MOH SOURCE 3 Enter source number e g 371 205 STN MOH OR MOH SOURCE 371 Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE 2 82 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE Assigns the LCR class of service allowed on a per station per trunk basis There are eight classes which may be assigned LCR class of service allows specific users to trunk ad vance up to a matching LCR class of service programmed in MMC 712 DEFAULT DATA LEAST COST ROUTING COS 1 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 310 201 LCR CLASS Display shows LCR CLASS 1 2 Dial station trunk number e g 205 205 LCR CLASS OR LCR CLASS 1 Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL LCR CLASS Select all stations GR 2 3 Dial 1 8 to select class type e g 3 205 LER TAS S OR LCR CLASS 3 Press Volume button to select class type and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS LCR PROGRAMMING MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC 711 LCR TIME TAB
322. ss Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter account code maximum 12 digits via dial keypad e g 1234 and press Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS 2 204 MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE Enables the account code entry feature There are 999 available entries DISPLAY ACCOUNT CODE 001 ACCOUNT CODE 005 ACCOUNT CODE 005 1234 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 709 TOLL PASS CODE SPECIAL CODE TABLE This MMC provides a means to program trunk code tables as described below No Special Code Description 0 PBX CODE This table contains up to five entries and is used to identify the trunk access codes needed for toll restriction when the system is used with either a PBX or a CENTREX supplied dial tone Toll restriction will only be applied on trunks flagged as PBX in MMC 401 if a trunk access code entered in this table is dialled Toll restriction will be applied to the digits following the trunk access code SPECIAL CODE This table identifies the special feature codes used to activate central office custom calling features such as CID Block and Call Waiting Disable The special feature codes can be used on a per call basis without affecting LCR or toll restriction pro gramming T
323. station MOH instead of dial tone 13 RECALL PIKUP Samsung Business Communications OFF When ON a call recalling to a station can be picked up using Direct Call Pickup Pickup Group and My Group features This applies to held calls recalling and transferred calls re calling to a station 2 55 CHAPTER 2 2 56 continued No Option Default Description 14 ICM EXT FWD OFF When ON call forward external is allowed when intercom calls are placed to a station that has Call Forward External pro grammed and set 16 DIDERR TONE OFF This option provides error tone when an invalid DID number is received 18 KTS DISC ALM OFF When ON generates a system alarm when a phone discon nects or connects 19 OFF HOOKALM OFF When ON generates a system alarm when a phone stays off hook longer than this timer 20 SLSELF RING OFF When ON generates ring of 10 seconds when a single line phone dials itself and hangs up self test 21 SGR INC BUSY OFF When ON generates busy tone when all station group members are busy for a group call This does not work for station groups which have Unconditional Ring mode set 24 TRANSFER OFF When OFF a single line phone can handle 2 calls simulta CANCEL neously using the hook flash to toggle between them When ON a single line phone can connect to the second call but pressi
324. sung Business Communications DISPLAY 201 SPEED NAME 00 205 SPEED NAME 00 305 SPEED NAME SPDBLK NOT EXIST 205 SPEED NAME Ones 205 SPEED NAME 01 SAM SMITH 2 13 CHAPTER 2 107 KEY EXTENDER Use this program to view the programmable buttons assigned to stations In addition it al lows the system administrator to assign key extenders to some keys to make a general ac cess feature key more specific The feature keys that can have extenders are listed below Key Feature Extender AB Absence Extension number ACC Account code bin 000 999 BOSS Boss and Secretary 1 4 CR VM Call Record Mailbox number CS UCD Call Status UCD group number DIR Directory dial by name type 1 3 DP Direct Pickup Extension or station group number DS Direct Station Select Station number FWRD Call Forward 0 7 GPIK Group Pickup 01 99 IG In Out of Group Station group number MMPG Meet Me Page 0 9 MW Message Waiting Extension or station group number MS Manual Signalling Extension or station group number PAGE Page 0 9 PARK Park Orbits 0 9 PMSG Programmed Station Messaging 01 20 RP Ring Plan 1 6 RSV Room Status View Hotel Application only 1 5 SG Station Group Station group number SP UCD Supervisor UCD group number SPD Speed Dial Perso
325. sung Business Communications 2 17 CHAPTER 2 109 DATE DISPLAY Allows the system administrator or technician to select the date and time display mode on a per station basis or system wide No Mode Description 0 COUNTRY Sets overall display format and has two options 0 ORIENTAL MM DD DAY HH MM 1 WESTERN DAY DD MON HH MM 1 CLOCK Sets format of clock display and has two options 0 12 HOUR Displays 1 as 01 00 1 24 HOUR Displays 1 as 13 00 2 DISPLAY Sets format of DAY and MON display and has two options 0 UPPER CASE Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR 1 LOWER CASE Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar CONDITIONS NONE DEFAULT DATA COUNTRY WESTERN CLOCK 12 HOUR DISPLAY LOWER CASE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 109 201 DAY FORMAT Display shows COUNTRY WESTERN 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 DAY FORMAT OR COUNTRY WESTERN Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL DAY FORMAT Select all stations COUNTRY 3 Dial 0 2 to select mode 205 DAY FORMAT OR COUNTRY ORIENTAL Press Volume button to scroll through modes and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Press Volume button to scroll through formats and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 2 18 Sa
326. t 1000 ms Register the GEN NO RESP Before sending Cancel SIP GEN NO RESP for General Request the User Agent waits this long 005000MS The range is 0 99900 ms Default 5000 ms Register the INV NO RESP Before sending Cancel SIP INV NO RESP for the Invite Request the User Agent waits this 006000MS long The range is 0 99900 ms Default 5000 ms Register the REQ RETRY After sending General Re SIP REQ RETRY quest he User Agent waits for the Final Response 005000MS for this length of time The range is 0 99900 ms Default is 5000 ms Register the PROVISIONAL After receiving the SIP PROVISIONAL Provision Response the User Agent waits this long 180000MS until Timeout ends The range is 0 999900 ms Default 180000 ms RELATED ITEMS MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION MMC 848 WLAN IP MAC LIST MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION Samsung Business Communications 2 329 CHAPTER 2 846 WIP INFORMATION This MMC sets up the WIP 5000M wireless terminal information No Parameter Description Default 00 REGISTERED Shows if the terminal is registered NO 01 LOCATED Shows if the terminal is connected to the system DETACH 02 PHONE TYPE Shows the type of the terminal NONE 03 WLI NUMBER Number of WLI connected to the WBS24 servic ing the terminal 04 WBS NUMBE Num
327. t Slot Cx Syy Pzz 62 MJE08 WBS Disconnect Indicates the WBS is disconnected Alarm Data CWBS xx or BWBS xx 63 MJE09 WBS connect Indicates the WBS is connected Samsung Business Communications Alarm Data CWBS xx or BWBS xx 2 341 CHAPTER 2 2 342 continued No Code Alarm Name Definition MNF Minor Error Minor Fault with Alarm Buffer saving 64 MNFO1 Card Out A circuit card mounted in a universal slot has been re moved from service or is not recognized by the system Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 65 MNF02 Card In A circuit card mounted in a universal slot has been re turned to service Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 66 MNF03 IPC Error Inter processor communication error has occurred Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 67 MNF04 Trunk Fault Out of service trunk detected via loop detect Internal CODEC test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 68 MNF05 Trunk Recovery Out of service trunk detected via loop detected as out of service is now operational Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 69 MNFO06 Trunk Discon Out of service trunk detected via seizure of trunk Exter nect nal seizure test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 70 MNF07 Trunk Connect Out of service trunk recovered via seizure of trunk Ex ternal seizure test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz 71 MNF
328. t the item and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor 4 Select the data 02 PRINTER IP OR 168 219 83 101 Press Volume to select the data and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 296 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol IP addressing of the MCP card No Parameter Description 00 SYSTEM IP ADDR Specifies the IP address for the MCP card 01 SYSTEM GATEWAY Specifies the designated gateway IP address used for contacting IP devices beyond the local network subnet 02 SYSTEM NET MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP devices subnet that are within direct reach of the MCP without having to go through the designated network IP gateway 03 SYSTEM RESET Prompt to reset system MCP when system IP address is changed This reset is same as FAST RESTART in MMC 811 04 SYSTEM IP TYPE Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private network 05 08 SYSTEM PUBLIC IP SYSTEM MAC ADDR The MCP will originate communications to IP phones and VoIP connections outside the local network using this IP address Com municatio
329. the dial keypad to select a Ring Plan e g 2 3 Press Right Soft button to enter and advance cursor 4 Press Volume button to scroll to assign Holiday and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 5 Press Volume button to select entry and press Right Soft button enter and advance cursor 6 Dial date for holiday using the dial keypad e g 0704 7 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME 2 162 DISPLAY RING PLAN FOLLOW 1 RING PLAN FOLLOW 2 RING PLAN FOLLOW 2 ASSIGN HOLIDAY 015 ASSIGN HOLIDAY 5 ASSIGN HOLIDAY 05 0704 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 513 HOTEL TIMER This MMC is where the Hotel timers for guest rooms are set These are system wide timers that affect all rooms Refer to your Hotel documentation for more details No Item Description 0 CHECK OUT TIME If a room is occupied after the checkout time an additional day s room charge will be automatically added to the room bill If a room is flagged as Occupied and HOLD then the additional day s room charge will not be added Setting a room status to HOLD allows a late checkout to be performed 1 ROOM CLEAN TIME This is the time each day that the system will flag all occupied rooms as NEEDS CLEANING 2 CHECK IN END TM This is used to decide if an additional day s room charge w
330. tion 1 Press Transfer button and enter 434 2 Enter station or trunk number Display show connection status 3 Enter another station or trunk OR Press Transfer button to exit Display status no connection 1 Press Transfer button and enter 434 2 Enter invalid station or trunk number Display show INVALID DATA 3 Enter another station or trunk OR Press Transfer button to exit Samsung Business Communications DIESPEAWVOSWATUS 201 IDLE DISPLAY STATUS 702 229 215 STATUS 702 216 gt DISPLAY STATUS Zi TOZ 22l DESETA LARUS 201 IDLE 702 702 DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE DISPLAY STATUS INVALID DATA DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE 2 135 CHAPTER 2 Display connection status with invalid trunk or station number 1 Press Transfer button and enter 434 DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE 2 Enter invalid station or trunk number DISPLAY STATUS Display show INVALID DATA INVALID DATA 3 Enter another station or trunk DISPLAY STATUS OR 201 IDLE Press Transfer button to exit Display connection status with trunk or station num ber in maintenance busy 1 Press Transfer button and enter 434 DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE 2 Enter station or trunk number DISPLAY STATUS Display show connection status 725 MADE BUSY 3 Enter another station or trunk DISPLAY STATUS OR
331. to move cursor Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 614 Samsung Business Communications STATION TRUNK USE GROUP DISPLAY 301 USE 301 DIAL YES 305 USE 301 DIAL YES ALL USE 301 DIAL YES 305 USE 304 DIAL YES 305 USE 304 DIAL NO 2 131 CHAPTER 2 432 This MMC is used to select the type of signalling for each H trunk There are three opera tion types available E amp M DID R D DEFAULT DATA E amp M ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 432 701 SET H TRK Display shows E amp M 2 Enter desired trunk number e g 705 705 SET H TRK OR E amp M Press Volume button to make selection Press Right Soft button to move cursor OR ALL SET H TRK Select all trunks E amp M 3 Press Volume button to select trunk type and 705 SET H TRK press Right Soft button to move cursor DID 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 132 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 433 COST RATE In this MMC the TRUNK COST RATE flags are entered for each trunk DIAL PLANs are defined in MMC 746 Costing Dial Plan RATE CALCULATION TABLES are defined in MMC 749 Each tru
332. to repeat the received digits CW Call Waiting Yes No Allows a second DID call to be received MC The maximum call count When this is set to 99 the feature will not work When set to 0 if a call comes in that matches DID digits and field then the sys tem will reject the call When set between 1 and 98 if a call comes in that matches DID digits and DGT field then the system counts the same DID digits and if the count is the same or higher than this value the system sends busy signal to caller DC The number of digits to delete This is useful with Tandem switching mixed numbering plans and DID Repeat digits over tie line Maximum number of digits that can be deleted is 16 NAME Enter up to 11 characters to identify call Refer to MMC 104 STATION NAME for how to enter the name TONE Assigns ring tone to DLI port CADENCE Assigns ring cadence to SLT port Samsung Business Communications 2 213 CHAPTER 2 DEFAULT DATA INDEX DIGIT MOH PRI 1 6 CW MC DC NAME 001 2 99 0 002 Q NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE 003 5t NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE 004 8 NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 714 Display shows 2 Enter valid index number e g 005 via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter digits to be transl
333. to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Samsung Business Communications 2 3 CHAPTER 2 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE Allows the system administrator or technician to reset any phone s passcode to its default value of 1234 This MMC cannot display station passcodes it can only reset them to de fault Phone users can set or change their individual passcodes The passcode is used to lock or unlock the phone for toll restriction call barring override and to access the DISA feature CONDITIONS e The passcode of a station performing Operator Level Programming or Technician Level Programming cannot be changed while the program mode is ENABLE e An Operator or Technician Level can only delete the passcode of a station and reset the passcode to the default value 1234 not permitting to know the passcode Default passcodes Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA access NOTE DEFAULT DATA ALL STATION PASSCODES 1234 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 101 201 PASSCODE Display shows PASSCODE 2 Dial phone number e g 205 205 PASSCODE OR PASSCODE Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move
334. ton to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTION Samsung Business Communications 2 43 CHAPTER 2 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING Used to open enable and close disable customer level programming If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC the error message NOT PERMIT will be displayed A four digits passcode is required to access this MMC Each digit can be 0 9 When opened this MMC enables access to all MMCs allowed in MMC 802 Customer Access MMC Number No Mode Description 0 DISABLE Open enable customer level programming 1 ENABLE Close disable customer level programming DEFAULT DATA DISABLE ACTION 1 2 3 4 5 Press Transfer button and enter 200 Display shows Enter passcode Correct code shows Incorrect code shows Press Volume button arrow key to select ENABLE or DISABLE and press Right Soft button OR Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry level and press Volume button to select MMC OR Enter MMC number and press Right Soft button to enter MMC Press Transfer button to exit RELATED ITEMS DISPLAY ENABLE CUS PROG PASSCODE ENABLE CUS PROG PASSCODE ENABLE CUS PROG DISABLE ENABLE CUS PROG PASSCODE ERROR ENABLE CUS PROG ENABLE
335. tone is heard DOOR LOCK RELES 500 100 2500 This timer controls how long the door lock MSEC relay will be activated DOOR RING DETECT 50 10 250 This timer controls the time before a call is MSEC answered by the door phone DOOR RING OFF TM 30 1 250 SEC This timer controls the duration of ringing at the door ring destination before automatically cancelling E HOLD RECALL TM 45 0 250 SEC This timer controls how long a call is held ex clusively at a station before recalling Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide continued Timer Name Default Range Unit Description FIRST DIGIT TIME 10 1 250 SEC This timer controls how long the system will wait for dialling to begin before dropping the dial tone and returning the you to error tone HOK FLASH MAX TM 120 20 2500 This timer monitors the duration of a hook MSEC switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and not a line noise or an accidental hook switch bounce LONGEST duration HOK FLASH MIN TM 80 20 2500 This timer monitors the duration of a hook MSEC switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and not a line noise or an accidental hook switch bounce SHORTEST duration HOOK OFF TIME 100 20 2500 This timer controls the time before dial tone is MSEC sent to a single line station HOOK ON TIME 200 20 2500 This timer sets the minimum amount of time that MSEC th
336. tor customer to have access to certain MMCs For example it is required that the customer has access to MMC 102 Call Forward for call forwarding but it is not required that the customer has access to MMC 710 LCR Digit Table for LCR dial plans This MMC is for both tenants DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 802 CUST USE MMC 1 Display shows 100 5 LOCK YES 2 Enter desired tenant number 1 2 via dial keypad CUST USE MMC 1 OR 100 STN LOCK YES Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter desired MMC number via dial keypad CUST USE MMC 1 OR 102 CALL FWD YES Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO via dial keypad CUST USE MMC 1 OR 102 CALL FWD NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Left Soft button to return to step 3 to make additional entries 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE 2 268 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 805 TX LEVEL AND GAIN Allows the system administrator to set the base level of TX volume on phones There are eight levels that can be controlled by the Volume buttons on phones and 10 controllable levels in the system This MMC allows the system administrator to classify any de
337. tton retreats cursor If valid entry system returns to step 2 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2 155 CHAPTER 2 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME Use this MMC to program Ring Plans time settings Ring Plans provide six separate ring ing destinations based on day of the week and time of day The start time within a plan is the time the system will switch from one ringing destination to the next The end time is the time the system will switch from that plan to the previous plan An RPO Ring Plan Override button is not needed as the system will switch automatically however it is helpful to have a dedicated button so the status can be manually changed if needed If a ring plan has no time entry the ring plan defaults to ring plan 1 The ring plans correlate with all MMCs that program ring or termination destinations and station and trunk COS The following example may be useful when assigning ring plan times RING PLAN Start Time End Time MON 1 ST 0000 END 23 59 MON 2 ST 0800 END 2200 MON 3 ST 1000 END 2000 MON 4 ST 1200 END 1800 MON 5 ST 1300 END 1600 MON 6 ST 1400 END 1500 Using a 24 hour clock in the example above notice that the END time is within the same 24 hour period as the START time The system will stay in
338. umn is numbered 1 12 from the top right column is numbered 13 24 from the top Buttons 19 to 24 are special buttons A F used for programming 12B LCD phone has 12 programmable buttons numbered 1 12 from top to bottom But tons 7 to 12 are special buttons A F used for programming 6B LCD phone has 6 programmable buttons left column is numbered 1 3 from the top right column is numbered 4 6 from the top Buttons 1 to are special buttons A C and buttons 4 to 6 are special buttons D F used for programming Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide The special buttons are referred to within the relevant MMCs For example button A is used to toggle between uppercase and lowercase characters when entering text on the dis play All programmable buttons can be programmed with functions as required The left soft button is used to save data or to move the cursor in the LCD display to the left The right soft button is used to save data or to move the cursor in the display to the right Other buttons also have special functions when in programming mode e ANS RLS Button Select ALL option for making changes to all rather than individual stations trunks etc Hold Button Clear an entry in the display e Volume Buttons Scroll through display options Transfer Button Enter MMC programming mode or store data and exit programming mode Speaker Button Store data a
339. ung Business Communications 2 47 CHAPTER 2 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE Assigns ringing device to be accessed when a Universal Answer UA key is pressed or the UA pickup code is dialled UA assignment is made in MMC 601 Assign Station Group for a group and then the group is entered here The device type is automatically determined by the Directory Number DN entered Ringing Device Description NONE NO UA No phone number STATION Station number STN GROUP Station group number RING PAGE External speaker phone number COMMON BELL Common bell phone number When setting the MMC 203 Only one of the above options can be selected If the ability to ring more than one item e g all four external page zones is required a station group containing all four zone codes must be created DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 203 ASSIGN UA PORT Display shows current assignment NONE NO UA 2 Dial DN of UA device e g 205 ASSIGN UA PORT OR 205 STATION Use Volume buttons to scroll through available devices 3 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP MMC 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE 2 48 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 204 COMMON BE
340. ursor Enter number of digits user will dial e g 3 for 3 digit extension OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter max number of digits system will dial OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter YES NO to display other node extension in internal extension number format OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor DISPLAY 01 6012 SIZE 0 MAX 00 Qe SIZE 0 MAX 00 01 601 gt 60201 SIZE 0 00 01 601 gt 60201 SIZE 3 00 01 601 gt 60201 SIZE 3 MAX 08 01 601 gt 60201 DISP N MBX N Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 7 Enter YES NO to assign Mailbox to remote 01 601 gt 60201 extension automatically DISP Y MBX N OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor 8 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN MMC 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID Samsung Business Communications 2 291 CHAPTER 2 825 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS Assigns the options used for networking No Option Description 0 ADD NUMBER TO Assign to include the extension number in the name field of Q SIG standard message
341. using SIP Server NAME 41 GW USER ID User ID for authorization when using SIP Server 42 REGISTER This password must be used to register SIP Server PSWD 43 EXPIRE This tims value is expire time 000000 SEC TIME 44 SESSION Settion Timer Value can be set NONE TIMER 0 NONE 1 UPDATE 2 REINVITE 45 SERVER SIP server vender value can be set 0 VENDOR O IETF 1 IMS 2 BroadWorks 3 Xener 4 Telcoware 5 SEC IMS 46 LINK TEST This value is for Link test between Proxy Server and Of NONE ficeServ system 0 NONE 1 OPTIONS DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 834 GATEWAY CALL ID 2 3 2 314 Display shows the first option Enter SIP option number 00 38 e g 01 via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter SIP option data via dial keypad OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor 1234 CALE RED ANI CALTER ID TE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER MMC 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER MMC 306 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN MMC 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE MMC 834 H 323
342. utton to scroll through toll classes and use Right Soft button to move the cursor 5 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Samsung Business Communications 2 103 CHAPTER 2 404 TRUNK Allows name up to 11 characters long to be entered to identify an individual trunk ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104 STATION NAME DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 404 701 TRUNK NAME Display shows 2 Dial trunk e g 704 704 TRUNK NAME OR Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move the cursor 3 Enter trunk name 704 TRUNK NAME Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 TELECOMS 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 104 STATION NAME MMC 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER 2 104 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER Allows a number up to 11 digits long to be entered to identify an individual trunk ENTERING NUMBERS Numbers are written using the keypad Each press of a key selects the digit and moves the cursor to the next position The button c
343. ved will be displayed first In the case of CLIP the number must be programmed in the CLIP translation table MMC 728 CLIP does not provide names DEFAULT DATA NUMBER FIRST ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 119 Display shows first station 2 Enter station number e g 205 OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button OR Select all stations 3 Dial display option 1 or 2 e g 2 OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right or Left Soft button to return to step 2 4 Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID MMC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK MMC 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY 201 CID DISP NUMBER FIRST 205 CID DISP NUMBER FIRST CID NUMBER FIRST 205 Cu DTS NAME FIRST CHAPTER 2 120 LARGE LCD OPTIONS Allows the system administrator to set any of the following options for large LCD phones No Option Description 0 IDLE DISPLAY Sets whether to display CALENDAR or INFORMATION on LCD when idle 1 DS KEY DISPLAY Sets whether to display extension numbers or names for DS keys on LCD 2 DIALMODE Sets dial mode to ENBLOCK OVERLAP 3 CONV DISP SOFT MENU FIRST If selected features assigned to keys
344. work features 52 CHKSPV OFF When ON if trunks don t have the supervision feature they cannot make outgoing transfers or unsupervised confer ences 53 PRE FWD OFF When ON and a call arrives at a busy station that is not set BUSY for forward busy if a preset no answer destination is avail able the call is re routed to that destination 54 ORG DIALLOG OFF When ON all dialled digits will be saved in the outgoing call Samsung Business Communications log for Large LCD phones When OFF invalid dialling such as dialling of a non existent station number will not be saved in the outgoing call log for Large LCD phones 2 57 CHAPTER 2 continued No Option Default Description 56 VOIP REALRBT OFF When ON the system will connect the real path of the outgo ing trunk to the incoming VoIP trunk user instead of providing virtual ringback tone 57 CO COTMALL OFF When ON the system trunk call will be attached timer for preven the call from locking up 58 SMDR LOG OFF In case of admin or normal station and although cost is 0 ALL the smdr record can be saved when this option is set 59 NO ITEM COST OFF When ON during check in in hotel item code and cost don t have to be entered It is possible to skip 60 SMDR OFF When ON the AUTHORIZATION CODE will be printed in AUT2ACC ACCOUNT field of SMDR 64
345. xit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 115 2 216 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 716 UK LCR OPTION This MMC provides UK LCR options No Option Description 0 NETWORK CODE This table is used to network access code when the call is routed to the secondary network This table contains up to 16 entries Each code has 4 digits maximum in length and use option for None CCC PIN or Both Default all codes are empty and all use options are none NONE This code doesn t use 1 CCC This code uses with Call Cast Code CCC 2 PIN This code uses with PIN Code 3 BOTH This code uses with PIN code and Call Cast Code 1 PIN CODE This table is used to PIN code when the call is routed to the secondary network This table contains up to 4 entries and each code has 10 digits maximum in length Default all tables are empty 2 CCC OPTION This is used to which number used for Call Cost Code Default Station Number 0 STATION NUMBER Station number uses for Call Cost Code 1 NONE Doesn t use Call Cost Code 3 STATION PIN NO This is assigned to PIN code table number for each station num ber Default all stations are 1 DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 716 NETWORK CODE Display shows Olg USE 2 Enter option nu
346. y save the SRAM to the MCDB This ensures that an up to date database is always available in case of a catastrophic failure A daily save time of 00 00 means that no daily save is performed It is recommended that the MCDB is cleared before the SRAM is copied to it When the SRAM is copied to the MCDB there is no interruption in service If the MCDB is copied to the SRAM the system will reset to accept the new data MCDB Mc card database S mm dd yy hh mm Indicates the time the database was saved to the MCDB CLEAR MCDB Clear MCDB COPY TO SRAM Copy MCDB to SRAM SRAM MCP on board database S mm dd yy hh mm Indicates the time the SRAM was last saved COPY TO MCDB Copy SRAM to MCDB DAILY SAVE hh mm The time the SRAM will be saved to the MCDB A MC Card of 256 MB SS A MC Card of 256 MB must be installed in order to copy the on board data NOTE base SRAM on to the MC card MCDB DEFAULT DATA DAILY SAVE 00 00 no daily save ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press Transfer button and enter 815 CUST DBASE MCDB Display shows 12 01 01 00 00 If MC card is in use the display shows CUST DBASE MCDB MMC IS BUSY Samsung Business Communications 2 279 CHAPTER 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Press Right Soft button to move cursor Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor Pres
347. zure LCR LCR means that MMC710 LCR DIGIT table will be used with out going digits OUT DIGIT CONDITIONS MMC724 FEATURE CODE E LCR1 E LCR2 E LCR3 E LCR4 addition DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION 1 Press Transfer button and enter 763 Display shows 2 Dial Table number 001 200 OR Press Volume button to select Table number and press Right Soft button to move cursor 3 Enter IN DIGIT maximum 16 digits and press Right Soft button to move cursor 4 Enter OUT DIGIT option number 1 OR Press Volume button to select OUT DIGIT and press Right Soft button to move cursor 2 264 DISPLAY 001 IN DIGIT 001 IN DIGIT 001 IN DIGIT 1234 001 OUT DIGIT Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 5 6 7 8 9 10 Enter OUT DIGIT maximum 16 digits and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter USE LCR NUM option number 2 OR Press Volume button to select USE LCR NUM and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter USE LCR NUM maximum 16 digits and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter NEXT ROUTE option number 3 OR Press Volume button to select NEXT ROUTE and press Right Soft button to move cursor Enter USE LCR NUM maximum 16 digits and press Right Soft button to move cursor Press Transfer button to save and exit OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC RELATED ITEMS MMC 3

Samsung 7100 Medical Alarms User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents